Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in gcc
cse.cc revision 1.1.1.1
      1 /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
      2    Copyright (C) 1987-2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3 
      4 This file is part of GCC.
      5 
      6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
      7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
      8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
      9 version.
     10 
     11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
     12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
     13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License
     14 for more details.
     15 
     16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3.  If not see
     18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.  */
     19 
     20 #include "config.h"
     21 #include "system.h"
     22 #include "coretypes.h"
     23 #include "backend.h"
     24 #include "target.h"
     25 #include "rtl.h"
     26 #include "tree.h"
     27 #include "cfghooks.h"
     28 #include "df.h"
     29 #include "memmodel.h"
     30 #include "tm_p.h"
     31 #include "insn-config.h"
     32 #include "regs.h"
     33 #include "emit-rtl.h"
     34 #include "recog.h"
     35 #include "cfgrtl.h"
     36 #include "cfganal.h"
     37 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
     38 #include "alias.h"
     39 #include "toplev.h"
     40 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
     41 #include "tree-pass.h"
     42 #include "dbgcnt.h"
     43 #include "rtl-iter.h"
     44 #include "regs.h"
     45 #include "function-abi.h"
     46 #include "rtlanal.h"
     47 #include "expr.h"
     48 
     49 /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
     50    through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
     51    have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
     52    expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
     53 
     54    It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
     55    when control paths merge in this code; so, at each label, we forget all
     56    that is known and start fresh.  This can be described as processing each
     57    extended basic block separately.  We have a separate pass to perform
     58    global CSE.
     59 
     60    Note CSE can turn a conditional or computed jump into a nop or
     61    an unconditional jump.  When this occurs we arrange to run the jump
     62    optimizer after CSE to delete the unreachable code.
     63 
     64    We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
     65    a hash table for most expressions, and a vector of "quantity
     66    numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
     67 
     68    The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
     69    because it is faster.  It is possible because registers references
     70    contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
     71    a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
     72    identical if they have the same number.  General expressions
     73    do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
     74    information recorded on an expression other than a register
     75    is to keep it in a hash table.
     76 
     77 Registers and "quantity numbers":
     78 
     79    At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
     80    registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
     81    numbers to indicate their contents.  During scan, when the code
     82    copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
     83    When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
     84    quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
     85    `REG_QTY (N)' records what quantity register N is currently thought
     86    of as containing.
     87 
     88    All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to zero.
     89    If register N has not been assigned a quantity, `REG_QTY (N)' will
     90    equal -N - 1, which is always negative.
     91 
     92    Quantity numbers below zero do not exist and none of the `qty_table'
     93    entries should be referenced with a negative index.
     94 
     95    We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
     96    quantity number.  The `qty_table` members `first_reg' and `last_reg',
     97    and `reg_eqv_table' members `next' and `prev' hold these chains.
     98 
     99    The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
    100    Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
    101    We replace any equivalent register with that one.
    102 
    103    If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
    104    REG expressions with qty_table `mode' must be in the hash table for both
    105    registers and must be in the same class.
    106 
    107    The converse is not true.  Since hard registers may be referenced in
    108    any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
    109    but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
    110    of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
    111 
    112 Constants and quantity numbers
    113 
    114    When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
    115    in the appropriate qty_table `const_rtx'.  This is in addition to
    116    putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
    117 
    118    Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
    119    macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value.  In any
    120    event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
    121 
    122    When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
    123    of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate qty_table
    124    `const_rtx'.
    125 
    126    Integer constants don't have a machine mode.  However, cse
    127    determines the intended machine mode from the destination
    128    of the instruction that moves the constant.  The machine mode
    129    is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
    130    constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
    131 
    132 Other expressions:
    133 
    134    To record known equivalences among expressions in general
    135    we use a hash table called `table'.  It has a fixed number of buckets
    136    that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
    137    These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
    138    hash codes.
    139 
    140    Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
    141    currently have equivalent values.
    142 
    143    Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
    144    the expression.  This is done using `reg_qty' and qty_table `first_reg'.
    145    The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
    146    number, not the register number.
    147 
    148    When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
    149    hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
    150    could be different as a result.
    151 
    152      1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
    153      ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed.  That is because
    154      nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
    155      The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
    156 
    157      The special cases are when the address is constant or is
    158      a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
    159      or a static chain pointer.  When such addresses are stored in,
    160      we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
    161      due to overlap.  `invalidate' does this.
    162      All expressions that refer to non-constant
    163      memory addresses are also invalidated.  `invalidate_memory' does this.
    164 
    165      2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
    166      containing references to that register, and only those,
    167      must be removed.
    168 
    169    Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
    170    a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
    171    Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
    172    entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
    173    changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
    174    the register's new value.  This sequence of circumstances is rare
    175    within any one basic block.
    176 
    177    `REG_TICK' and `REG_IN_TABLE', accessors for members of
    178    cse_reg_info, are used to detect this case.  REG_TICK (i) is
    179    incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
    180    REG_IN_TABLE (i) holds -1 if no references to register i have been
    181    entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value REG_TICK (i)
    182    had when the references were entered.  If we want to enter a
    183    reference and REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i), we must scan and
    184    remove old references.  Until we want to enter a new entry, the
    185    mere fact that the two vectors don't match makes the entries be
    186    ignored if anyone tries to match them.
    187 
    188    Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
    189    the equivalent-register chains.  However, `REG_TICK' and
    190    `REG_IN_TABLE' do not apply to expressions which are simple
    191    register references.  These expressions are removed from the table
    192    immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
    193    we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
    194    the register.
    195 
    196    A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
    197    reuse.  A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
    198    invalidates everything that resides in memory.
    199 
    200 Related expressions:
    201 
    202    Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
    203    are called related.  When a constant expression is put in
    204    the table, the related expression with no constant term
    205    is also entered.  These are made to point at each other
    206    so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
    207    register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression.  */
    208 
    209 /* Length of qty_table vector.  We know in advance we will not need
    210    a quantity number this big.  */
    211 
    212 static int max_qty;
    213 
    214 /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
    215    This is 1 + the largest number needed so far.  */
    216 
    217 static int next_qty;
    218 
    219 /* Per-qty information tracking.
    220 
    221    `first_reg' and `last_reg' track the head and tail of the
    222    chain of registers which currently contain this quantity.
    223 
    224    `mode' contains the machine mode of this quantity.
    225 
    226    `const_rtx' holds the rtx of the constant value of this
    227    quantity, if known.  A summations of the frame/arg pointer
    228    and a constant can also be entered here.  When this holds
    229    a known value, `const_insn' is the insn which stored the
    230    constant value.
    231 
    232    `comparison_{code,const,qty}' are used to track when a
    233    comparison between a quantity and some constant or register has
    234    been passed.  In such a case, we know the results of the comparison
    235    in case we see it again.  These members record a comparison that
    236    is known to be true.  `comparison_code' holds the rtx code of such
    237    a comparison, else it is set to UNKNOWN and the other two
    238    comparison members are undefined.  `comparison_const' holds
    239    the constant being compared against, or zero if the comparison
    240    is not against a constant.  `comparison_qty' holds the quantity
    241    being compared against when the result is known.  If the comparison
    242    is not with a register, `comparison_qty' is INT_MIN.  */
    243 
    244 struct qty_table_elem
    245 {
    246   rtx const_rtx;
    247   rtx_insn *const_insn;
    248   rtx comparison_const;
    249   int comparison_qty;
    250   unsigned int first_reg, last_reg;
    251   /* The sizes of these fields should match the sizes of the
    252      code and mode fields of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h).  */
    253   ENUM_BITFIELD(rtx_code) comparison_code : 16;
    254   ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
    255 };
    256 
    257 /* The table of all qtys, indexed by qty number.  */
    258 static struct qty_table_elem *qty_table;
    259 
    260 /* Insn being scanned.  */
    261 
    262 static rtx_insn *this_insn;
    263 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
    264 
    265 /* Index by register number, gives the number of the next (or
    266    previous) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
    267    value.
    268 
    269    Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
    270 
    271    If REG_QTY (N) == -N - 1, reg_eqv_table[N].next is undefined.  */
    272 
    273 /* Per-register equivalence chain.  */
    274 struct reg_eqv_elem
    275 {
    276   int next, prev;
    277 };
    278 
    279 /* The table of all register equivalence chains.  */
    280 static struct reg_eqv_elem *reg_eqv_table;
    281 
    282 struct cse_reg_info
    283 {
    284   /* The timestamp at which this register is initialized.  */
    285   unsigned int timestamp;
    286 
    287   /* The quantity number of the register's current contents.  */
    288   int reg_qty;
    289 
    290   /* The number of times the register has been altered in the current
    291      basic block.  */
    292   int reg_tick;
    293 
    294   /* The REG_TICK value at which rtx's containing this register are
    295      valid in the hash table.  If this does not equal the current
    296      reg_tick value, such expressions existing in the hash table are
    297      invalid.  */
    298   int reg_in_table;
    299 
    300   /* The SUBREG that was set when REG_TICK was last incremented.  Set
    301      to -1 if the last store was to the whole register, not a subreg.  */
    302   unsigned int subreg_ticked;
    303 };
    304 
    305 /* A table of cse_reg_info indexed by register numbers.  */
    306 static struct cse_reg_info *cse_reg_info_table;
    307 
    308 /* The size of the above table.  */
    309 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_size;
    310 
    311 /* The index of the first entry that has not been initialized.  */
    312 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized;
    313 
    314 /* The timestamp at the beginning of the current run of
    315    cse_extended_basic_block.  We increment this variable at the beginning of
    316    the current run of cse_extended_basic_block.  The timestamp field of a
    317    cse_reg_info entry matches the value of this variable if and only
    318    if the entry has been initialized during the current run of
    319    cse_extended_basic_block.  */
    320 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_timestamp;
    321 
    322 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
    323    currently a REG expression in the hash table.  Note the difference
    324    from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
    325    expression in the table.  */
    326 
    327 static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
    328 
    329 /* True if CSE has altered the CFG.  */
    330 static bool cse_cfg_altered;
    331 
    332 /* True if CSE has altered conditional jump insns in such a way
    333    that jump optimization should be redone.  */
    334 static bool cse_jumps_altered;
    335 
    336 /* True if we put a LABEL_REF into the hash table for an INSN
    337    without a REG_LABEL_OPERAND, we have to rerun jump after CSE
    338    to put in the note.  */
    339 static bool recorded_label_ref;
    340 
    341 /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record if it notices a reference to PC or
    342    some other volatile subexpression.  */
    343 
    344 static int do_not_record;
    345 
    346 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
    347    if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed.  */
    348 
    349 static int hash_arg_in_memory;
    350 
    351 /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
    352    each recording one expression's information.
    353    That expression is in the `exp' field.
    354 
    355    The canon_exp field contains a canonical (from the point of view of
    356    alias analysis) version of the `exp' field.
    357 
    358    Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
    359    through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
    360 
    361    Each set of expressions with equivalent values
    362    are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
    363    and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
    364    the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
    365    that chain.  The chain is in order of increasing cost.
    366    Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
    367 
    368    The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
    369    involve any reference to memory.  These elements are removed
    370    whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
    371    To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
    372    the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
    373    the frame pointer or argument pointer.
    374 
    375    The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
    376    (that differ by adding an integer).
    377    The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
    378    `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
    379    chain is not useful.
    380 
    381    The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
    382    The `regcost' field stores the value returned by approx_reg_cost for
    383    this element's expression.
    384 
    385    The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
    386    a fixed address).
    387 
    388    The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
    389 
    390    The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
    391    if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
    392    field is the mode it was being used as.  Each constant is
    393    recorded separately for each mode it is used with.  */
    394 
    395 struct table_elt
    396 {
    397   rtx exp;
    398   rtx canon_exp;
    399   struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
    400   struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
    401   struct table_elt *next_same_value;
    402   struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
    403   struct table_elt *first_same_value;
    404   struct table_elt *related_value;
    405   int cost;
    406   int regcost;
    407   /* The size of this field should match the size
    408      of the mode field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h).  */
    409   ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
    410   char in_memory;
    411   char is_const;
    412   char flag;
    413 };
    414 
    415 /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
    416    things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
    417    down a lot of loops that happen frequently.  */
    418 #define HASH_SHIFT	5
    419 #define HASH_SIZE	(1 << HASH_SHIFT)
    420 #define HASH_MASK	(HASH_SIZE - 1)
    421 
    422 /* Compute hash code of X in mode M.  Special-case case where X is a pseudo
    423    register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set).  */
    424 
    425 #define HASH(X, M)	\
    426  ((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER	\
    427   ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X)))	\
    428   : canon_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
    429 
    430 /* Like HASH, but without side-effects.  */
    431 #define SAFE_HASH(X, M)	\
    432  ((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER	\
    433   ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X)))	\
    434   : safe_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
    435 
    436 /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for the
    437    purpose of approximating register costs.
    438    It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
    439    non-fixed hard regs.
    440    A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed.  */
    441 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N)  \
    442   ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
    443    || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N])
    444 
    445 /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt.  Fixed
    446    hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
    447    of 0.  Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
    448    a cost of 2.  Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'.  */
    449 
    450 #define CHEAP_REGNO(N)							\
    451   (REGNO_PTR_FRAME_P (N)						\
    452    || (HARD_REGISTER_NUM_P (N)						\
    453        && FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
    454 
    455 #define COST(X, MODE)							\
    456   (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, MODE, SET, 1))
    457 #define COST_IN(X, MODE, OUTER, OPNO)					\
    458   (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, MODE, OUTER, OPNO))
    459 
    460 /* Get the number of times this register has been updated in this
    461    basic block.  */
    462 
    463 #define REG_TICK(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_tick)
    464 
    465 /* Get the point at which REG was recorded in the table.  */
    466 
    467 #define REG_IN_TABLE(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_in_table)
    468 
    469 /* Get the SUBREG set at the last increment to REG_TICK (-1 if not a
    470    SUBREG).  */
    471 
    472 #define SUBREG_TICKED(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->subreg_ticked)
    473 
    474 /* Get the quantity number for REG.  */
    475 
    476 #define REG_QTY(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_qty)
    477 
    478 /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
    479    into the qty_table.  */
    480 
    481 #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (REG_QTY (N) >= 0)
    482 
    483 /* Compare table_elt X and Y and return true iff X is cheaper than Y.  */
    484 
    485 #define CHEAPER(X, Y) \
    486  (preferable ((X)->cost, (X)->regcost, (Y)->cost, (Y)->regcost) < 0)
    487 
    488 static struct table_elt *table[HASH_SIZE];
    489 
    490 /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
    491    but currently removed from the table.  */
    492 
    493 static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
    494 
    495 /* Trace a patch through the CFG.  */
    496 
    497 struct branch_path
    498 {
    499   /* The basic block for this path entry.  */
    500   basic_block bb;
    501 };
    502 
    503 /* This data describes a block that will be processed by
    504    cse_extended_basic_block.  */
    505 
    506 struct cse_basic_block_data
    507 {
    508   /* Total number of SETs in block.  */
    509   int nsets;
    510   /* Size of current branch path, if any.  */
    511   int path_size;
    512   /* Current path, indicating which basic_blocks will be processed.  */
    513   struct branch_path *path;
    514 };
    515 
    516 
    517 /* Pointers to the live in/live out bitmaps for the boundaries of the
    518    current EBB.  */
    519 static bitmap cse_ebb_live_in, cse_ebb_live_out;
    520 
    521 /* A simple bitmap to track which basic blocks have been visited
    522    already as part of an already processed extended basic block.  */
    523 static sbitmap cse_visited_basic_blocks;
    524 
    525 static bool fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x);
    526 static int notreg_cost (rtx, machine_mode, enum rtx_code, int);
    527 static int preferable (int, int, int, int);
    528 static void new_basic_block (void);
    529 static void make_new_qty (unsigned int, machine_mode);
    530 static void make_regs_eqv (unsigned int, unsigned int);
    531 static void delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int);
    532 static int mention_regs (rtx);
    533 static int insert_regs (rtx, struct table_elt *, int);
    534 static void remove_from_table (struct table_elt *, unsigned);
    535 static void remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx, unsigned);
    536 static struct table_elt *lookup (rtx, unsigned, machine_mode);
    537 static struct table_elt *lookup_for_remove (rtx, unsigned, machine_mode);
    538 static rtx lookup_as_function (rtx, enum rtx_code);
    539 static struct table_elt *insert_with_costs (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
    540 					    machine_mode, int, int);
    541 static struct table_elt *insert (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
    542 				 machine_mode);
    543 static void merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *, struct table_elt *);
    544 static void invalidate (rtx, machine_mode);
    545 static void remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int);
    546 static void remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int, poly_uint64,
    547 					machine_mode);
    548 static void rehash_using_reg (rtx);
    549 static void invalidate_memory (void);
    550 static rtx use_related_value (rtx, struct table_elt *);
    551 
    552 static inline unsigned canon_hash (rtx, machine_mode);
    553 static inline unsigned safe_hash (rtx, machine_mode);
    554 static inline unsigned hash_rtx_string (const char *);
    555 
    556 static rtx canon_reg (rtx, rtx_insn *);
    557 static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
    558 					   machine_mode *,
    559 					   machine_mode *);
    560 static rtx fold_rtx (rtx, rtx_insn *);
    561 static rtx equiv_constant (rtx);
    562 static void record_jump_equiv (rtx_insn *, bool);
    563 static void record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx, rtx,
    564 			      int);
    565 static void cse_insn (rtx_insn *);
    566 static void cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
    567 static void invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx_insn *);
    568 static void invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (rtx_insn *);
    569 static void cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
    570 extern void dump_class (struct table_elt*);
    571 static void get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno);
    572 static struct cse_reg_info * get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno);
    573 
    574 static void flush_hash_table (void);
    575 static bool insn_live_p (rtx_insn *, int *);
    576 static bool set_live_p (rtx, int *);
    577 static void cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx_insn *, rtx);
    578 static void cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx);
    579 static machine_mode cse_cc_succs (basic_block, basic_block, rtx, rtx,
    580 				       bool);
    581 
    582 
    584 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
    585 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART		gen_lowpart_if_possible
    586 
    587 static const struct rtl_hooks cse_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
    588 
    589 /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer).  */
    591 
    592 static bool
    593 fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x)
    594 {
    595   switch (GET_CODE (x))
    596     {
    597     case REG:
    598       if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx)
    599 	return true;
    600       if (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM])
    601 	return true;
    602       return false;
    603 
    604     case PLUS:
    605       if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
    606 	return false;
    607       return fixed_base_plus_p (XEXP (x, 0));
    608 
    609     default:
    610       return false;
    611     }
    612 }
    613 
    614 /* Dump the expressions in the equivalence class indicated by CLASSP.
    615    This function is used only for debugging.  */
    616 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
    617 dump_class (struct table_elt *classp)
    618 {
    619   struct table_elt *elt;
    620 
    621   fprintf (stderr, "Equivalence chain for ");
    622   print_rtl (stderr, classp->exp);
    623   fprintf (stderr, ": \n");
    624 
    625   for (elt = classp->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
    626     {
    627       print_rtl (stderr, elt->exp);
    628       fprintf (stderr, "\n");
    629     }
    630 }
    631 
    632 /* Return an estimate of the cost of the registers used in an rtx.
    633    This is mostly the number of different REG expressions in the rtx;
    634    however for some exceptions like fixed registers we use a cost of
    635    0.  If any other hard register reference occurs, return MAX_COST.  */
    636 
    637 static int
    638 approx_reg_cost (const_rtx x)
    639 {
    640   int cost = 0;
    641   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
    642   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, x, NONCONST)
    643     {
    644       const_rtx x = *iter;
    645       if (REG_P (x))
    646 	{
    647 	  unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
    648 	  if (!CHEAP_REGNO (regno))
    649 	    {
    650 	      if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
    651 		{
    652 		  if (targetm.small_register_classes_for_mode_p (GET_MODE (x)))
    653 		    return MAX_COST;
    654 		  cost += 2;
    655 		}
    656 	      else
    657 		cost += 1;
    658 	    }
    659 	}
    660     }
    661   return cost;
    662 }
    663 
    664 /* Return a negative value if an rtx A, whose costs are given by COST_A
    665    and REGCOST_A, is more desirable than an rtx B.
    666    Return a positive value if A is less desirable, or 0 if the two are
    667    equally good.  */
    668 static int
    669 preferable (int cost_a, int regcost_a, int cost_b, int regcost_b)
    670 {
    671   /* First, get rid of cases involving expressions that are entirely
    672      unwanted.  */
    673   if (cost_a != cost_b)
    674     {
    675       if (cost_a == MAX_COST)
    676 	return 1;
    677       if (cost_b == MAX_COST)
    678 	return -1;
    679     }
    680 
    681   /* Avoid extending lifetimes of hardregs.  */
    682   if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
    683     {
    684       if (regcost_a == MAX_COST)
    685 	return 1;
    686       if (regcost_b == MAX_COST)
    687 	return -1;
    688     }
    689 
    690   /* Normal operation costs take precedence.  */
    691   if (cost_a != cost_b)
    692     return cost_a - cost_b;
    693   /* Only if these are identical consider effects on register pressure.  */
    694   if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
    695     return regcost_a - regcost_b;
    696   return 0;
    697 }
    698 
    699 /* Internal function, to compute cost when X is not a register; called
    700    from COST macro to keep it simple.  */
    701 
    702 static int
    703 notreg_cost (rtx x, machine_mode mode, enum rtx_code outer, int opno)
    704 {
    705   scalar_int_mode int_mode, inner_mode;
    706   return ((GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
    707 	   && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
    708 	   && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
    709 	   && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), &inner_mode)
    710 	   && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
    711 	   && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
    712 	   && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (int_mode, inner_mode))
    713 	  ? 0
    714 	  : rtx_cost (x, mode, outer, opno, optimize_this_for_speed_p) * 2);
    715 }
    716 
    717 
    718 /* Initialize CSE_REG_INFO_TABLE.  */
    720 
    721 static void
    722 init_cse_reg_info (unsigned int nregs)
    723 {
    724   /* Do we need to grow the table?  */
    725   if (nregs > cse_reg_info_table_size)
    726     {
    727       unsigned int new_size;
    728 
    729       if (cse_reg_info_table_size < 2048)
    730 	{
    731 	  /* Compute a new size that is a power of 2 and no smaller
    732 	     than the large of NREGS and 64.  */
    733 	  new_size = (cse_reg_info_table_size
    734 		      ? cse_reg_info_table_size : 64);
    735 
    736 	  while (new_size < nregs)
    737 	    new_size *= 2;
    738 	}
    739       else
    740 	{
    741 	  /* If we need a big table, allocate just enough to hold
    742 	     NREGS registers.  */
    743 	  new_size = nregs;
    744 	}
    745 
    746       /* Reallocate the table with NEW_SIZE entries.  */
    747       free (cse_reg_info_table);
    748       cse_reg_info_table = XNEWVEC (struct cse_reg_info, new_size);
    749       cse_reg_info_table_size = new_size;
    750       cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = 0;
    751     }
    752 
    753   /* Do we have all of the first NREGS entries initialized?  */
    754   if (cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized < nregs)
    755     {
    756       unsigned int old_timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp - 1;
    757       unsigned int i;
    758 
    759       /* Put the old timestamp on newly allocated entries so that they
    760 	 will all be considered out of date.  We do not touch those
    761 	 entries beyond the first NREGS entries to be nice to the
    762 	 virtual memory.  */
    763       for (i = cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized; i < nregs; i++)
    764 	cse_reg_info_table[i].timestamp = old_timestamp;
    765 
    766       cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = nregs;
    767     }
    768 }
    769 
    770 /* Given REGNO, initialize the cse_reg_info entry for REGNO.  */
    771 
    772 static void
    773 get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno)
    774 {
    775   /* Set TIMESTAMP field to CSE_REG_INFO_TIMESTAMP so that this
    776      entry will be considered to have been initialized.  */
    777   cse_reg_info_table[regno].timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp;
    778 
    779   /* Initialize the rest of the entry.  */
    780   cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_tick = 1;
    781   cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_in_table = -1;
    782   cse_reg_info_table[regno].subreg_ticked = -1;
    783   cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_qty = -regno - 1;
    784 }
    785 
    786 /* Find a cse_reg_info entry for REGNO.  */
    787 
    788 static inline struct cse_reg_info *
    789 get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno)
    790 {
    791   struct cse_reg_info *p = &cse_reg_info_table[regno];
    792 
    793   /* If this entry has not been initialized, go ahead and initialize
    794      it.  */
    795   if (p->timestamp != cse_reg_info_timestamp)
    796     get_cse_reg_info_1 (regno);
    797 
    798   return p;
    799 }
    800 
    801 /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
    802    for a new basic block.  */
    803 
    804 static void
    805 new_basic_block (void)
    806 {
    807   int i;
    808 
    809   next_qty = 0;
    810 
    811   /* Invalidate cse_reg_info_table.  */
    812   cse_reg_info_timestamp++;
    813 
    814   /* Clear out hash table state for this pass.  */
    815   CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
    816 
    817   /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
    818      much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'.  */
    819 
    820   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
    821     {
    822       struct table_elt *first;
    823 
    824       first = table[i];
    825       if (first != NULL)
    826 	{
    827 	  struct table_elt *last = first;
    828 
    829 	  table[i] = NULL;
    830 
    831 	  while (last->next_same_hash != NULL)
    832 	    last = last->next_same_hash;
    833 
    834 	  /* Now relink this hash entire chain into
    835 	     the free element list.  */
    836 
    837 	  last->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
    838 	  free_element_chain = first;
    839 	}
    840     }
    841 }
    842 
    843 /* Say that register REG contains a quantity in mode MODE not in any
    844    register before and initialize that quantity.  */
    845 
    846 static void
    847 make_new_qty (unsigned int reg, machine_mode mode)
    848 {
    849   int q;
    850   struct qty_table_elem *ent;
    851   struct reg_eqv_elem *eqv;
    852 
    853   gcc_assert (next_qty < max_qty);
    854 
    855   q = REG_QTY (reg) = next_qty++;
    856   ent = &qty_table[q];
    857   ent->first_reg = reg;
    858   ent->last_reg = reg;
    859   ent->mode = mode;
    860   ent->const_rtx = ent->const_insn = NULL;
    861   ent->comparison_code = UNKNOWN;
    862 
    863   eqv = &reg_eqv_table[reg];
    864   eqv->next = eqv->prev = -1;
    865 }
    866 
    867 /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
    868    OLD is not changing; NEW is.  */
    869 
    870 static void
    871 make_regs_eqv (unsigned int new_reg, unsigned int old_reg)
    872 {
    873   unsigned int lastr, firstr;
    874   int q = REG_QTY (old_reg);
    875   struct qty_table_elem *ent;
    876 
    877   ent = &qty_table[q];
    878 
    879   /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number.  */
    880   gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old_reg));
    881 
    882   REG_QTY (new_reg) = q;
    883   firstr = ent->first_reg;
    884   lastr = ent->last_reg;
    885 
    886   /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything.  Prefer pseudo regs to other
    887      hard regs.  Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
    888      of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
    889      make it the new canonical replacement for this qty.  */
    890   if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
    891       /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS.  This means
    892 	 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
    893 	 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
    894 	 either.  */
    895       && (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new_reg) != NO_REGS)
    896       && ((new_reg < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new_reg))
    897 	  || (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
    898 	      && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
    899 		  || (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, new_reg)
    900 		      && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, firstr))
    901 		  || (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, new_reg)
    902 		      && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, firstr))))))
    903     {
    904       reg_eqv_table[firstr].prev = new_reg;
    905       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = firstr;
    906       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = -1;
    907       ent->first_reg = new_reg;
    908     }
    909   else
    910     {
    911       /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
    912 	 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
    913 	 end.  Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
    914 	 equivalent for anything.  */
    915       while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev >= 0
    916 	     && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
    917 	     && new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
    918 	lastr = reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev;
    919       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = reg_eqv_table[lastr].next;
    920       if (reg_eqv_table[lastr].next >= 0)
    921 	reg_eqv_table[reg_eqv_table[lastr].next].prev = new_reg;
    922       else
    923 	qty_table[q].last_reg = new_reg;
    924       reg_eqv_table[lastr].next = new_reg;
    925       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = lastr;
    926     }
    927 }
    928 
    929 /* Remove REG from its equivalence class.  */
    930 
    931 static void
    932 delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int reg)
    933 {
    934   struct qty_table_elem *ent;
    935   int q = REG_QTY (reg);
    936   int p, n;
    937 
    938   /* If invalid, do nothing.  */
    939   if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (reg))
    940     return;
    941 
    942   ent = &qty_table[q];
    943 
    944   p = reg_eqv_table[reg].prev;
    945   n = reg_eqv_table[reg].next;
    946 
    947   if (n != -1)
    948     reg_eqv_table[n].prev = p;
    949   else
    950     ent->last_reg = p;
    951   if (p != -1)
    952     reg_eqv_table[p].next = n;
    953   else
    954     ent->first_reg = n;
    955 
    956   REG_QTY (reg) = -reg - 1;
    957 }
    958 
    959 /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
    960    that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
    961 
    962    Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
    963    as subexpressions will be considered valid.
    964 
    965    mention_regs is not called when a register itself
    966    is being stored in the table.
    967 
    968    Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
    969    of X.  */
    970 
    971 static int
    972 mention_regs (rtx x)
    973 {
    974   enum rtx_code code;
    975   int i, j;
    976   const char *fmt;
    977   int changed = 0;
    978 
    979   if (x == 0)
    980     return 0;
    981 
    982   code = GET_CODE (x);
    983   if (code == REG)
    984     {
    985       unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
    986       unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
    987       unsigned int i;
    988 
    989       for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
    990 	{
    991 	  if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
    992 	    remove_invalid_refs (i);
    993 
    994 	  REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
    995 	  SUBREG_TICKED (i) = -1;
    996 	}
    997 
    998       return 0;
    999     }
   1000 
   1001   /* If this is a SUBREG, we don't want to discard other SUBREGs of the same
   1002      pseudo if they don't use overlapping words.  We handle only pseudos
   1003      here for simplicity.  */
   1004   if (code == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
   1005       && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   1006     {
   1007       unsigned int i = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
   1008 
   1009       if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
   1010 	{
   1011 	  /* If REG_IN_TABLE (i) differs from REG_TICK (i) by one, and
   1012 	     the last store to this register really stored into this
   1013 	     subreg, then remove the memory of this subreg.
   1014 	     Otherwise, remove any memory of the entire register and
   1015 	     all its subregs from the table.  */
   1016 	  if (REG_TICK (i) - REG_IN_TABLE (i) > 1
   1017 	      || SUBREG_TICKED (i) != REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)))
   1018 	    remove_invalid_refs (i);
   1019 	  else
   1020 	    remove_invalid_subreg_refs (i, SUBREG_BYTE (x), GET_MODE (x));
   1021 	}
   1022 
   1023       REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
   1024       SUBREG_TICKED (i) = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
   1025       return 0;
   1026     }
   1027 
   1028   /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
   1029      that does not have a quantity, give it one.  This is so that a later
   1030      call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
   1031      hash code and not found in the table after that call.
   1032 
   1033      It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
   1034      fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
   1035      call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
   1036      use of the register is in the comparison.  */
   1037 
   1038   if (code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
   1039     {
   1040       if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
   1041 	  && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
   1042 	if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL, 0))
   1043 	  {
   1044 	    rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
   1045 	    changed = 1;
   1046 	  }
   1047 
   1048       if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 1))
   1049 	  && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
   1050 	if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL, 0))
   1051 	  {
   1052 	    rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
   1053 	    changed = 1;
   1054 	  }
   1055     }
   1056 
   1057   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
   1058   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   1059     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
   1060       changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
   1061     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
   1062       for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
   1063 	changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
   1064 
   1065   return changed;
   1066 }
   1067 
   1068 /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
   1069    with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
   1070    (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
   1071    If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
   1072    Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
   1073    before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
   1074 
   1075    Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
   1076    so X's hash code may be different.  */
   1077 
   1078 static int
   1079 insert_regs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, int modified)
   1080 {
   1081   if (REG_P (x))
   1082     {
   1083       unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
   1084       int qty_valid;
   1085 
   1086       /* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
   1087 	 wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here.  */
   1088 
   1089       qty_valid = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno);
   1090       if (qty_valid)
   1091 	{
   1092 	  struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[REG_QTY (regno)];
   1093 
   1094 	  if (ent->mode != GET_MODE (x))
   1095 	    return 0;
   1096 	}
   1097 
   1098       if (modified || ! qty_valid)
   1099 	{
   1100 	  if (classp)
   1101 	    for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
   1102 		 classp != 0;
   1103 		 classp = classp->next_same_value)
   1104 	      if (REG_P (classp->exp)
   1105 		  && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
   1106 		{
   1107 		  unsigned c_regno = REGNO (classp->exp);
   1108 
   1109 		  gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (c_regno));
   1110 
   1111 		  /* Suppose that 5 is hard reg and 100 and 101 are
   1112 		     pseudos.  Consider
   1113 
   1114 		     (set (reg:si 100) (reg:si 5))
   1115 		     (set (reg:si 5) (reg:si 100))
   1116 		     (set (reg:di 101) (reg:di 5))
   1117 
   1118 		     We would now set REG_QTY (101) = REG_QTY (5), but the
   1119 		     entry for 5 is in SImode.  When we use this later in
   1120 		     copy propagation, we get the register in wrong mode.  */
   1121 		  if (qty_table[REG_QTY (c_regno)].mode != GET_MODE (x))
   1122 		    continue;
   1123 
   1124 		  make_regs_eqv (regno, c_regno);
   1125 		  return 1;
   1126 		}
   1127 
   1128 	  /* Mention_regs for a SUBREG checks if REG_TICK is exactly one larger
   1129 	     than REG_IN_TABLE to find out if there was only a single preceding
   1130 	     invalidation - for the SUBREG - or another one, which would be
   1131 	     for the full register.  However, if we find here that REG_TICK
   1132 	     indicates that the register is invalid, it means that it has
   1133 	     been invalidated in a separate operation.  The SUBREG might be used
   1134 	     now (then this is a recursive call), or we might use the full REG
   1135 	     now and a SUBREG of it later.  So bump up REG_TICK so that
   1136 	     mention_regs will do the right thing.  */
   1137 	  if (! modified
   1138 	      && REG_IN_TABLE (regno) >= 0
   1139 	      && REG_TICK (regno) == REG_IN_TABLE (regno) + 1)
   1140 	    REG_TICK (regno)++;
   1141 	  make_new_qty (regno, GET_MODE (x));
   1142 	  return 1;
   1143 	}
   1144 
   1145       return 0;
   1146     }
   1147 
   1148   /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
   1149      table.  If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
   1150      this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
   1151      not be accessible because its hash code will have changed.  So assign
   1152      a quantity number now.  */
   1153 
   1154   else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
   1155 	   && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
   1156     {
   1157       insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL, 0);
   1158       mention_regs (x);
   1159       return 1;
   1160     }
   1161   else
   1162     return mention_regs (x);
   1163 }
   1164 
   1165 
   1167 /* Compute upper and lower anchors for CST.  Also compute the offset of CST
   1168    from these anchors/bases such that *_BASE + *_OFFS = CST.  Return false iff
   1169    CST is equal to an anchor.  */
   1170 
   1171 static bool
   1172 compute_const_anchors (rtx cst,
   1173 		       HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_offs,
   1174 		       HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_offs)
   1175 {
   1176   unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n = UINTVAL (cst);
   1177 
   1178   *lower_base = n & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1);
   1179   if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) *lower_base == n)
   1180     return false;
   1181 
   1182   *upper_base = ((n + (targetm.const_anchor - 1))
   1183 		 & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1));
   1184   *upper_offs = n - *upper_base;
   1185   *lower_offs = n - *lower_base;
   1186   return true;
   1187 }
   1188 
   1189 /* Insert the equivalence between ANCHOR and (REG + OFF) in mode MODE.  */
   1190 
   1191 static void
   1192 insert_const_anchor (HOST_WIDE_INT anchor, rtx reg, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
   1193 		     machine_mode mode)
   1194 {
   1195   struct table_elt *elt;
   1196   unsigned hash;
   1197   rtx anchor_exp;
   1198   rtx exp;
   1199 
   1200   anchor_exp = gen_int_mode (anchor, mode);
   1201   hash = HASH (anchor_exp, mode);
   1202   elt = lookup (anchor_exp, hash, mode);
   1203   if (!elt)
   1204     elt = insert (anchor_exp, NULL, hash, mode);
   1205 
   1206   exp = plus_constant (mode, reg, offs);
   1207   /* REG has just been inserted and the hash codes recomputed.  */
   1208   mention_regs (exp);
   1209   hash = HASH (exp, mode);
   1210 
   1211   /* Use the cost of the register rather than the whole expression.  When
   1212      looking up constant anchors we will further offset the corresponding
   1213      expression therefore it does not make sense to prefer REGs over
   1214      reg-immediate additions.  Prefer instead the oldest expression.  Also
   1215      don't prefer pseudos over hard regs so that we derive constants in
   1216      argument registers from other argument registers rather than from the
   1217      original pseudo that was used to synthesize the constant.  */
   1218   insert_with_costs (exp, elt, hash, mode, COST (reg, mode), 1);
   1219 }
   1220 
   1221 /* The constant CST is equivalent to the register REG.  Create
   1222    equivalences between the two anchors of CST and the corresponding
   1223    register-offset expressions using REG.  */
   1224 
   1225 static void
   1226 insert_const_anchors (rtx reg, rtx cst, machine_mode mode)
   1227 {
   1228   HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
   1229 
   1230   if (!compute_const_anchors (cst, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
   1231 			      &upper_base, &upper_offs))
   1232       return;
   1233 
   1234   /* Ignore anchors of value 0.  Constants accessible from zero are
   1235      simple.  */
   1236   if (lower_base != 0)
   1237     insert_const_anchor (lower_base, reg, -lower_offs, mode);
   1238 
   1239   if (upper_base != 0)
   1240     insert_const_anchor (upper_base, reg, -upper_offs, mode);
   1241 }
   1242 
   1243 /* We need to express ANCHOR_ELT->exp + OFFS.  Walk the equivalence list of
   1244    ANCHOR_ELT and see if offsetting any of the entries by OFFS would create a
   1245    valid expression.  Return the cheapest and oldest of such expressions.  In
   1246    *OLD, return how old the resulting expression is compared to the other
   1247    equivalent expressions.  */
   1248 
   1249 static rtx
   1250 find_reg_offset_for_const (struct table_elt *anchor_elt, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
   1251 			   unsigned *old)
   1252 {
   1253   struct table_elt *elt;
   1254   unsigned idx;
   1255   struct table_elt *match_elt;
   1256   rtx match;
   1257 
   1258   /* Find the cheapest and *oldest* expression to maximize the chance of
   1259      reusing the same pseudo.  */
   1260 
   1261   match_elt = NULL;
   1262   match = NULL_RTX;
   1263   for (elt = anchor_elt->first_same_value, idx = 0;
   1264        elt;
   1265        elt = elt->next_same_value, idx++)
   1266     {
   1267       if (match_elt && CHEAPER (match_elt, elt))
   1268 	return match;
   1269 
   1270       if (REG_P (elt->exp)
   1271 	  || (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == PLUS
   1272 	      && REG_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))
   1273 	      && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == CONST_INT))
   1274 	{
   1275 	  rtx x;
   1276 
   1277 	  /* Ignore expressions that are no longer valid.  */
   1278 	  if (!REG_P (elt->exp) && !exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
   1279 	    continue;
   1280 
   1281 	  x = plus_constant (GET_MODE (elt->exp), elt->exp, offs);
   1282 	  if (REG_P (x)
   1283 	      || (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
   1284 		  && IN_RANGE (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)),
   1285 			       -targetm.const_anchor,
   1286 			       targetm.const_anchor - 1)))
   1287 	    {
   1288 	      match = x;
   1289 	      match_elt = elt;
   1290 	      *old = idx;
   1291 	    }
   1292 	}
   1293     }
   1294 
   1295   return match;
   1296 }
   1297 
   1298 /* Try to express the constant SRC_CONST using a register+offset expression
   1299    derived from a constant anchor.  Return it if successful or NULL_RTX,
   1300    otherwise.  */
   1301 
   1302 static rtx
   1303 try_const_anchors (rtx src_const, machine_mode mode)
   1304 {
   1305   struct table_elt *lower_elt, *upper_elt;
   1306   HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
   1307   rtx lower_anchor_rtx, upper_anchor_rtx;
   1308   rtx lower_exp = NULL_RTX, upper_exp = NULL_RTX;
   1309   unsigned lower_old, upper_old;
   1310 
   1311   /* CONST_INT is used for CC modes, but we should leave those alone.  */
   1312   if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
   1313     return NULL_RTX;
   1314 
   1315   gcc_assert (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode));
   1316   if (!compute_const_anchors (src_const, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
   1317 			      &upper_base, &upper_offs))
   1318     return NULL_RTX;
   1319 
   1320   lower_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (lower_base);
   1321   upper_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (upper_base);
   1322   lower_elt = lookup (lower_anchor_rtx, HASH (lower_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
   1323   upper_elt = lookup (upper_anchor_rtx, HASH (upper_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
   1324 
   1325   if (lower_elt)
   1326     lower_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (lower_elt, lower_offs, &lower_old);
   1327   if (upper_elt)
   1328     upper_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (upper_elt, upper_offs, &upper_old);
   1329 
   1330   if (!lower_exp)
   1331     return upper_exp;
   1332   if (!upper_exp)
   1333     return lower_exp;
   1334 
   1335   /* Return the older expression.  */
   1336   return (upper_old > lower_old ? upper_exp : lower_exp);
   1337 }
   1338 
   1339 /* Look in or update the hash table.  */
   1341 
   1342 /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
   1343    HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
   1344    It's an argument because often that is known in advance
   1345    and we save much time not recomputing it.  */
   1346 
   1347 static void
   1348 remove_from_table (struct table_elt *elt, unsigned int hash)
   1349 {
   1350   if (elt == 0)
   1351     return;
   1352 
   1353   /* Mark this element as removed.  See cse_insn.  */
   1354   elt->first_same_value = 0;
   1355 
   1356   /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class.  */
   1357 
   1358   {
   1359     struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
   1360     struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
   1361 
   1362     if (next)
   1363       next->prev_same_value = prev;
   1364 
   1365     if (prev)
   1366       prev->next_same_value = next;
   1367     else
   1368       {
   1369 	struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
   1370 	while (next)
   1371 	  {
   1372 	    next->first_same_value = newfirst;
   1373 	    next = next->next_same_value;
   1374 	  }
   1375       }
   1376   }
   1377 
   1378   /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket.  */
   1379 
   1380   {
   1381     struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
   1382     struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
   1383 
   1384     if (next)
   1385       next->prev_same_hash = prev;
   1386 
   1387     if (prev)
   1388       prev->next_same_hash = next;
   1389     else if (table[hash] == elt)
   1390       table[hash] = next;
   1391     else
   1392       {
   1393 	/* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket.  This can happen
   1394 	   when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'.  Search
   1395 	   for the hash bucket that it heads.  This happens only very
   1396 	   rarely, so the cost is acceptable.  */
   1397 	for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
   1398 	  if (table[hash] == elt)
   1399 	    table[hash] = next;
   1400       }
   1401   }
   1402 
   1403   /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain.  */
   1404 
   1405   if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
   1406     {
   1407       struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
   1408 
   1409       while (p->related_value != elt)
   1410 	p = p->related_value;
   1411       p->related_value = elt->related_value;
   1412       if (p->related_value == p)
   1413 	p->related_value = 0;
   1414     }
   1415 
   1416   /* Now add it to the free element chain.  */
   1417   elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
   1418   free_element_chain = elt;
   1419 }
   1420 
   1421 /* Same as above, but X is a pseudo-register.  */
   1422 
   1423 static void
   1424 remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx x, unsigned int hash)
   1425 {
   1426   struct table_elt *elt;
   1427 
   1428   /* Because a pseudo-register can be referenced in more than one
   1429      mode, we might have to remove more than one table entry.  */
   1430   while ((elt = lookup_for_remove (x, hash, VOIDmode)))
   1431     remove_from_table (elt, hash);
   1432 }
   1433 
   1434 /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
   1435    or 0 if X is not in the table.
   1436 
   1437    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
   1438    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
   1439 
   1440    Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
   1441    looks like X.  */
   1442 
   1443 static struct table_elt *
   1444 lookup (rtx x, unsigned int hash, machine_mode mode)
   1445 {
   1446   struct table_elt *p;
   1447 
   1448   for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
   1449     if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && REG_P (x))
   1450 			    || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, !REG_P (x), false)))
   1451       return p;
   1452 
   1453   return 0;
   1454 }
   1455 
   1456 /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
   1457    Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register.  */
   1458 
   1459 static struct table_elt *
   1460 lookup_for_remove (rtx x, unsigned int hash, machine_mode mode)
   1461 {
   1462   struct table_elt *p;
   1463 
   1464   if (REG_P (x))
   1465     {
   1466       unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
   1467 
   1468       /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
   1469 	 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0).  */
   1470       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
   1471 	if (REG_P (p->exp)
   1472 	    && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
   1473 	  return p;
   1474     }
   1475   else
   1476     {
   1477       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
   1478 	if (mode == p->mode
   1479 	    && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, false)))
   1480 	  return p;
   1481     }
   1482 
   1483   return 0;
   1484 }
   1485 
   1486 /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
   1487    If one is found, return that expression.  */
   1488 
   1489 static rtx
   1490 lookup_as_function (rtx x, enum rtx_code code)
   1491 {
   1492   struct table_elt *p
   1493     = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, VOIDmode), GET_MODE (x));
   1494 
   1495   if (p == 0)
   1496     return 0;
   1497 
   1498   for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   1499     if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
   1500 	/* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table.  */
   1501 	&& exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
   1502       return p->exp;
   1503 
   1504   return 0;
   1505 }
   1506 
   1507 /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code and
   1508    CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in (or 0 if a new
   1509    class should be made).  COST is the code of X and reg_cost is the
   1510    cost of registers in X.  It is inserted at the proper position to
   1511    keep the class in the order cheapest first.
   1512 
   1513    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
   1514    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
   1515 
   1516    For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
   1517    goes in front, except that the first element in the list
   1518    remains first unless a cheaper element is added.  The order of
   1519    pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
   1520    find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
   1521 
   1522    The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
   1523    The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
   1524 
   1525    You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
   1526    and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
   1527    you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
   1528 
   1529    If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities.  */
   1530 
   1531 static struct table_elt *
   1532 insert_with_costs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
   1533 		   machine_mode mode, int cost, int reg_cost)
   1534 {
   1535   struct table_elt *elt;
   1536 
   1537   /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
   1538      something is wrong.  */
   1539   gcc_assert (!REG_P (x) || REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)));
   1540 
   1541   /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table.  */
   1542   if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   1543     add_to_hard_reg_set (&hard_regs_in_table, GET_MODE (x), REGNO (x));
   1544 
   1545   /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket.  */
   1546 
   1547   elt = free_element_chain;
   1548   if (elt)
   1549     free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
   1550   else
   1551     elt = XNEW (struct table_elt);
   1552 
   1553   elt->exp = x;
   1554   elt->canon_exp = NULL_RTX;
   1555   elt->cost = cost;
   1556   elt->regcost = reg_cost;
   1557   elt->next_same_value = 0;
   1558   elt->prev_same_value = 0;
   1559   elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
   1560   elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
   1561   elt->related_value = 0;
   1562   elt->in_memory = 0;
   1563   elt->mode = mode;
   1564   elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x) || fixed_base_plus_p (x));
   1565 
   1566   if (table[hash])
   1567     table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
   1568   table[hash] = elt;
   1569 
   1570   /* Put it into the proper value-class.  */
   1571   if (classp)
   1572     {
   1573       classp = classp->first_same_value;
   1574       if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
   1575 	/* Insert at the head of the class.  */
   1576 	{
   1577 	  struct table_elt *p;
   1578 	  elt->next_same_value = classp;
   1579 	  classp->prev_same_value = elt;
   1580 	  elt->first_same_value = elt;
   1581 
   1582 	  for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   1583 	    p->first_same_value = elt;
   1584 	}
   1585       else
   1586 	{
   1587 	  /* Insert not at head of the class.  */
   1588 	  /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X.  */
   1589 	  struct table_elt *p, *next;
   1590 
   1591 	  for (p = classp;
   1592 	       (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
   1593 	       p = next)
   1594 	    ;
   1595 
   1596 	  /* Put it after P and before NEXT.  */
   1597 	  elt->next_same_value = next;
   1598 	  if (next)
   1599 	    next->prev_same_value = elt;
   1600 
   1601 	  elt->prev_same_value = p;
   1602 	  p->next_same_value = elt;
   1603 	  elt->first_same_value = classp;
   1604 	}
   1605     }
   1606   else
   1607     elt->first_same_value = elt;
   1608 
   1609   /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
   1610      being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
   1611 
   1612      If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
   1613      and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register.  So
   1614      we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
   1615      inserted).
   1616 
   1617      If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
   1618      constant, we must check the entire class.
   1619 
   1620      If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
   1621      update the qtys `const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
   1622      insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant.  */
   1623 
   1624   if (elt->is_const && classp && REG_P (classp->exp)
   1625       && !REG_P (x))
   1626     {
   1627       int exp_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (classp->exp));
   1628       struct qty_table_elem *exp_ent = &qty_table[exp_q];
   1629 
   1630       exp_ent->const_rtx = gen_lowpart (exp_ent->mode, x);
   1631       exp_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
   1632     }
   1633 
   1634   else if (REG_P (x)
   1635 	   && classp
   1636 	   && ! qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
   1637 	   && ! elt->is_const)
   1638     {
   1639       struct table_elt *p;
   1640 
   1641       for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
   1642 	{
   1643 	  if (p->is_const && !REG_P (p->exp))
   1644 	    {
   1645 	      int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
   1646 	      struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
   1647 
   1648 	      x_ent->const_rtx
   1649 		= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
   1650 	      x_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
   1651 	      break;
   1652 	    }
   1653 	}
   1654     }
   1655 
   1656   else if (REG_P (x)
   1657 	   && qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
   1658 	   && GET_MODE (x) == qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].mode)
   1659     qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_insn = this_insn;
   1660 
   1661   /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
   1662      and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
   1663      link it up with related expressions.  */
   1664   if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
   1665     {
   1666       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
   1667       unsigned subhash;
   1668       struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
   1669 
   1670       if (subexp != 0)
   1671 	{
   1672 	  /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table.  */
   1673 	  subhash = SAFE_HASH (subexp, mode);
   1674 	  subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
   1675 	  if (subelt == 0)
   1676 	    subelt = insert (subexp, NULL, subhash, mode);
   1677 	  /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none.  */
   1678 	  if (subelt->related_value == 0)
   1679 	    subelt->related_value = subelt;
   1680 	  /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT.  */
   1681 	  subelt_prev = subelt;
   1682 	  while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
   1683 	    subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
   1684 	  /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
   1685 	     This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one.  */
   1686 	  elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
   1687 	  subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
   1688 	}
   1689     }
   1690 
   1691   return elt;
   1692 }
   1693 
   1694 /* Wrap insert_with_costs by passing the default costs.  */
   1695 
   1696 static struct table_elt *
   1697 insert (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
   1698 	machine_mode mode)
   1699 {
   1700   return insert_with_costs (x, classp, hash, mode,
   1701 			    COST (x, mode), approx_reg_cost (x));
   1702 }
   1703 
   1704 
   1705 /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
   1707    CLASS2 into CLASS1.  This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
   1708    the two classes equivalent.
   1709 
   1710    CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
   1711    call.
   1712 
   1713    Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied.  */
   1714 
   1715 static void
   1716 merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *class1, struct table_elt *class2)
   1717 {
   1718   struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new_elt;
   1719 
   1720   /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes.  */
   1721   class1 = class1->first_same_value;
   1722   class2 = class2->first_same_value;
   1723 
   1724   /* If they were already equal, forget it.  */
   1725   if (class1 == class2)
   1726     return;
   1727 
   1728   for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
   1729     {
   1730       unsigned int hash;
   1731       rtx exp = elt->exp;
   1732       machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
   1733 
   1734       next = elt->next_same_value;
   1735 
   1736       /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
   1737 	 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
   1738 	 hash code (it also isn't necessary).  */
   1739       if (REG_P (exp) || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, false))
   1740 	{
   1741 	  bool need_rehash = false;
   1742 
   1743 	  hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
   1744 	  hash = HASH (exp, mode);
   1745 
   1746 	  if (REG_P (exp))
   1747 	    {
   1748 	      need_rehash = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (exp));
   1749 	      delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
   1750 	    }
   1751 
   1752 	  if (REG_P (exp) && REGNO (exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   1753 	    remove_pseudo_from_table (exp, hash);
   1754 	  else
   1755 	    remove_from_table (elt, hash);
   1756 
   1757 	  if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0) || need_rehash)
   1758 	    {
   1759 	      rehash_using_reg (exp);
   1760 	      hash = HASH (exp, mode);
   1761 	    }
   1762 	  new_elt = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
   1763 	  new_elt->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
   1764 	  if (GET_CODE (exp) == ASM_OPERANDS && elt->cost == MAX_COST)
   1765 	    new_elt->cost = MAX_COST;
   1766 	}
   1767     }
   1768 }
   1769 
   1770 /* Flush the entire hash table.  */
   1772 
   1773 static void
   1774 flush_hash_table (void)
   1775 {
   1776   int i;
   1777   struct table_elt *p;
   1778 
   1779   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
   1780     for (p = table[i]; p; p = table[i])
   1781       {
   1782 	/* Note that invalidate can remove elements
   1783 	   after P in the current hash chain.  */
   1784 	if (REG_P (p->exp))
   1785 	  invalidate (p->exp, VOIDmode);
   1786 	else
   1787 	  remove_from_table (p, i);
   1788       }
   1789 }
   1790 
   1791 /* Check whether an anti dependence exists between X and EXP.  MODE and
   1793    ADDR are as for canon_anti_dependence.  */
   1794 
   1795 static bool
   1796 check_dependence (const_rtx x, rtx exp, machine_mode mode, rtx addr)
   1797 {
   1798   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
   1799   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, x, NONCONST)
   1800     {
   1801       const_rtx x = *iter;
   1802       if (MEM_P (x) && canon_anti_dependence (x, true, exp, mode, addr))
   1803 	return true;
   1804     }
   1805   return false;
   1806 }
   1807 
   1808 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid, all expressions whose
   1809    values could be altered by storing in register X.  */
   1810 
   1811 static void
   1812 invalidate_reg (rtx x)
   1813 {
   1814   gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x) == REG);
   1815 
   1816   /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents are recorded
   1817      through the qty number mechanism.  Just change the qty number of
   1818      the register, mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
   1819      and remove it itself.  */
   1820   unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
   1821   unsigned int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
   1822 
   1823   /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
   1824      that its value might have changed.  If it is a pseudo, remove its
   1825      entry from the hash table.
   1826 
   1827      For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
   1828      additional hard registers corresponding to X.  Then, if any of these
   1829      registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
   1830      overlap these registers.  */
   1831 
   1832   delete_reg_equiv (regno);
   1833   REG_TICK (regno)++;
   1834   SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
   1835 
   1836   if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   1837     remove_pseudo_from_table (x, hash);
   1838   else
   1839     {
   1840       HOST_WIDE_INT in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
   1841       unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
   1842       unsigned int rn;
   1843       struct table_elt *p, *next;
   1844 
   1845       CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
   1846 
   1847       for (rn = regno + 1; rn < endregno; rn++)
   1848 	{
   1849 	  in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
   1850 	  CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
   1851 	  delete_reg_equiv (rn);
   1852 	  REG_TICK (rn)++;
   1853 	  SUBREG_TICKED (rn) = -1;
   1854 	}
   1855 
   1856       if (in_table)
   1857 	for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
   1858 	  for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
   1859 	    {
   1860 	      next = p->next_same_hash;
   1861 
   1862 	      if (!REG_P (p->exp) || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   1863 		continue;
   1864 
   1865 	      unsigned int tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
   1866 	      unsigned int tendregno = END_REGNO (p->exp);
   1867 	      if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
   1868 		remove_from_table (p, hash);
   1869 	    }
   1870     }
   1871 }
   1872 
   1873 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid, all expressions whose
   1874    values could be altered by storing in X.  X is a register, a subreg, or
   1875    a memory reference with nonvarying address (because, when a memory
   1876    reference with a varying address is stored in, all memory references are
   1877    removed by invalidate_memory so specific invalidation is superfluous).
   1878    FULL_MODE, if not VOIDmode, indicates that this much should be
   1879    invalidated instead of just the amount indicated by the mode of X.  This
   1880    is only used for bitfield stores into memory.
   1881 
   1882    A nonvarying address may be just a register or just a symbol reference,
   1883    or it may be either of those plus a numeric offset.  */
   1884 
   1885 static void
   1886 invalidate (rtx x, machine_mode full_mode)
   1887 {
   1888   int i;
   1889   struct table_elt *p;
   1890   rtx addr;
   1891 
   1892   switch (GET_CODE (x))
   1893     {
   1894     case REG:
   1895       invalidate_reg (x);
   1896       return;
   1897 
   1898     case SUBREG:
   1899       invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x), VOIDmode);
   1900       return;
   1901 
   1902     case PARALLEL:
   1903       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; --i)
   1904 	invalidate (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), VOIDmode);
   1905       return;
   1906 
   1907     case EXPR_LIST:
   1908       /* This is part of a disjoint return value; extract the location in
   1909 	 question ignoring the offset.  */
   1910       invalidate (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode);
   1911       return;
   1912 
   1913     case MEM:
   1914       addr = canon_rtx (get_addr (XEXP (x, 0)));
   1915       /* Calculate the canonical version of X here so that
   1916 	 true_dependence doesn't generate new RTL for X on each call.  */
   1917       x = canon_rtx (x);
   1918 
   1919       /* Remove all hash table elements that refer to overlapping pieces of
   1920 	 memory.  */
   1921       if (full_mode == VOIDmode)
   1922 	full_mode = GET_MODE (x);
   1923 
   1924       for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
   1925 	{
   1926 	  struct table_elt *next;
   1927 
   1928 	  for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
   1929 	    {
   1930 	      next = p->next_same_hash;
   1931 	      if (p->in_memory)
   1932 		{
   1933 		  /* Just canonicalize the expression once;
   1934 		     otherwise each time we call invalidate
   1935 		     true_dependence will canonicalize the
   1936 		     expression again.  */
   1937 		  if (!p->canon_exp)
   1938 		    p->canon_exp = canon_rtx (p->exp);
   1939 		  if (check_dependence (p->canon_exp, x, full_mode, addr))
   1940 		    remove_from_table (p, i);
   1941 		}
   1942 	    }
   1943 	}
   1944       return;
   1945 
   1946     default:
   1947       gcc_unreachable ();
   1948     }
   1949 }
   1950 
   1951 /* Invalidate DEST.  Used when DEST is not going to be added
   1952    into the hash table for some reason, e.g. do_not_record
   1953    flagged on it.  */
   1954 
   1955 static void
   1956 invalidate_dest (rtx dest)
   1957 {
   1958   if (REG_P (dest)
   1959       || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
   1960       || MEM_P (dest))
   1961     invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
   1962   else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
   1963 	   || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   1964     invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
   1965 }
   1966 
   1967 /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
   1969    since they are already invalid, and we are about to
   1970    mark that register valid again and don't want the old
   1971    expressions to reappear as valid.  */
   1972 
   1973 static void
   1974 remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int regno)
   1975 {
   1976   unsigned int i;
   1977   struct table_elt *p, *next;
   1978 
   1979   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
   1980     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
   1981       {
   1982 	next = p->next_same_hash;
   1983 	if (!REG_P (p->exp) && refers_to_regno_p (regno, p->exp))
   1984 	  remove_from_table (p, i);
   1985       }
   1986 }
   1987 
   1988 /* Likewise for a subreg with subreg_reg REGNO, subreg_byte OFFSET,
   1989    and mode MODE.  */
   1990 static void
   1991 remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int regno, poly_uint64 offset,
   1992 			    machine_mode mode)
   1993 {
   1994   unsigned int i;
   1995   struct table_elt *p, *next;
   1996 
   1997   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
   1998     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
   1999       {
   2000 	rtx exp = p->exp;
   2001 	next = p->next_same_hash;
   2002 
   2003 	if (!REG_P (exp)
   2004 	    && (GET_CODE (exp) != SUBREG
   2005 		|| !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (exp))
   2006 		|| REGNO (SUBREG_REG (exp)) != regno
   2007 		|| ranges_maybe_overlap_p (SUBREG_BYTE (exp),
   2008 					   GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (exp)),
   2009 					   offset, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
   2010 	    && refers_to_regno_p (regno, p->exp))
   2011 	  remove_from_table (p, i);
   2012       }
   2013 }
   2014 
   2015 /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
   2017    reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
   2018 
   2019    This is called when we make a jump equivalence.  */
   2020 
   2021 static void
   2022 rehash_using_reg (rtx x)
   2023 {
   2024   unsigned int i;
   2025   struct table_elt *p, *next;
   2026   unsigned hash;
   2027 
   2028   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
   2029     x = SUBREG_REG (x);
   2030 
   2031   /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
   2032      valid entries in the table, we have no work to do.  */
   2033 
   2034   if (!REG_P (x)
   2035       || REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) < 0
   2036       || REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) != REG_TICK (REGNO (x)))
   2037     return;
   2038 
   2039   /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
   2040      If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it.  */
   2041 
   2042   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
   2043     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
   2044       {
   2045 	next = p->next_same_hash;
   2046 	if (reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
   2047 	    && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false)
   2048 	    && i != (hash = SAFE_HASH (p->exp, p->mode)))
   2049 	  {
   2050 	    if (p->next_same_hash)
   2051 	      p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
   2052 
   2053 	    if (p->prev_same_hash)
   2054 	      p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
   2055 	    else
   2056 	      table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
   2057 
   2058 	    p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
   2059 	    p->prev_same_hash = 0;
   2060 	    if (table[hash])
   2061 	      table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
   2062 	    table[hash] = p;
   2063 	  }
   2064       }
   2065 }
   2066 
   2067 /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
   2069    register in INSN.  Also update their TICK values.  */
   2070 
   2071 static void
   2072 invalidate_for_call (rtx_insn *insn)
   2073 {
   2074   unsigned int regno;
   2075   unsigned hash;
   2076   struct table_elt *p, *next;
   2077   int in_table = 0;
   2078   hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi;
   2079 
   2080   /* Go through all the hard registers.  For each that might be clobbered
   2081      in call insn INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
   2082      reg_tick if defined.  Also see if any of these registers is currently
   2083      in the table.
   2084 
   2085      ??? We could be more precise for partially-clobbered registers,
   2086      and only invalidate values that actually occupy the clobbered part
   2087      of the registers.  It doesn't seem worth the effort though, since
   2088      we shouldn't see this situation much before RA.  Whatever choice
   2089      we make here has to be consistent with the table walk below,
   2090      so any change to this test will require a change there too.  */
   2091   HARD_REG_SET callee_clobbers
   2092     = insn_callee_abi (insn).full_and_partial_reg_clobbers ();
   2093   EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (callee_clobbers, 0, regno, hrsi)
   2094     {
   2095       delete_reg_equiv (regno);
   2096       if (REG_TICK (regno) >= 0)
   2097 	{
   2098 	  REG_TICK (regno)++;
   2099 	  SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
   2100 	}
   2101       in_table |= (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno) != 0);
   2102     }
   2103 
   2104   /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
   2105      table, we are done.  Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
   2106      entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register.  */
   2107 
   2108   if (in_table)
   2109     for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
   2110       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
   2111 	{
   2112 	  next = p->next_same_hash;
   2113 
   2114 	  if (!REG_P (p->exp)
   2115 	      || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   2116 	    continue;
   2117 
   2118 	  /* This must use the same test as above rather than the
   2119 	     more accurate clobbers_reg_p.  */
   2120 	  if (overlaps_hard_reg_set_p (callee_clobbers, GET_MODE (p->exp),
   2121 				       REGNO (p->exp)))
   2122 	    remove_from_table (p, hash);
   2123 	}
   2124 }
   2125 
   2126 /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
   2128    and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
   2129    is not in the hash table),
   2130    return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
   2131    If none can be found, return 0.  */
   2132 
   2133 static rtx
   2134 use_related_value (rtx x, struct table_elt *elt)
   2135 {
   2136   struct table_elt *relt = 0;
   2137   struct table_elt *p, *q;
   2138   HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
   2139 
   2140   /* First, is there anything related known?
   2141      If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
   2142      Otherwise, must look it up.  */
   2143 
   2144   if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
   2145     relt = elt;
   2146   else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
   2147     {
   2148       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
   2149       if (subexp != 0)
   2150 	relt = lookup (subexp,
   2151 		       SAFE_HASH (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)),
   2152 		       GET_MODE (subexp));
   2153     }
   2154 
   2155   if (relt == 0)
   2156     return 0;
   2157 
   2158   /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
   2159      equivalent register.  */
   2160 
   2161   p = relt;
   2162   while (1)
   2163     {
   2164       /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
   2165 	 The first is when X is already in the table.  Then it is searching
   2166 	 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT).  The second case is when
   2167 	 X is not in the table.  Then RELT points to a class for the related
   2168 	 value.
   2169 
   2170 	 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
   2171 	 the same value as X.  */
   2172 
   2173       if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
   2174 	q = 0;
   2175       else
   2176 	for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
   2177 	  if (REG_P (q->exp))
   2178 	    break;
   2179 
   2180       if (q)
   2181 	break;
   2182 
   2183       p = p->related_value;
   2184 
   2185       /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
   2186 	 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
   2187 	 and it has no related values recorded.  */
   2188       if (p == relt || p == 0)
   2189 	break;
   2190     }
   2191 
   2192   if (q == 0)
   2193     return 0;
   2194 
   2195   offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
   2196   /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity.  */
   2197   return plus_constant (q->mode, q->exp, offset);
   2198 }
   2199 
   2200 
   2202 /* Hash a string.  Just add its bytes up.  */
   2203 static inline unsigned
   2204 hash_rtx_string (const char *ps)
   2205 {
   2206   unsigned hash = 0;
   2207   const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) ps;
   2208 
   2209   if (p)
   2210     while (*p)
   2211       hash += *p++;
   2212 
   2213   return hash;
   2214 }
   2215 
   2216 /* Same as hash_rtx, but call CB on each rtx if it is not NULL.
   2217    When the callback returns true, we continue with the new rtx.  */
   2218 
   2219 unsigned
   2220 hash_rtx_cb (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
   2221              int *do_not_record_p, int *hash_arg_in_memory_p,
   2222              bool have_reg_qty, hash_rtx_callback_function cb)
   2223 {
   2224   int i, j;
   2225   unsigned hash = 0;
   2226   enum rtx_code code;
   2227   const char *fmt;
   2228   machine_mode newmode;
   2229   rtx newx;
   2230 
   2231   /* Used to turn recursion into iteration.  We can't rely on GCC's
   2232      tail-recursion elimination since we need to keep accumulating values
   2233      in HASH.  */
   2234  repeat:
   2235   if (x == 0)
   2236     return hash;
   2237 
   2238   /* Invoke the callback first.  */
   2239   if (cb != NULL
   2240       && ((*cb) (x, mode, &newx, &newmode)))
   2241     {
   2242       hash += hash_rtx_cb (newx, newmode, do_not_record_p,
   2243                            hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, cb);
   2244       return hash;
   2245     }
   2246 
   2247   code = GET_CODE (x);
   2248   switch (code)
   2249     {
   2250     case REG:
   2251       {
   2252 	unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
   2253 
   2254 	if (do_not_record_p && !reload_completed)
   2255 	  {
   2256 	    /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
   2257 	       because extending its life will cause reload problems.  We
   2258 	       consider ap, fp, sp, gp to be fixed for this purpose.
   2259 
   2260 	       We also consider CCmode registers to be fixed for this purpose;
   2261 	       failure to do so leads to failure to simplify 0<100 type of
   2262 	       conditionals.
   2263 
   2264 	       On all machines, we can't record any global registers.
   2265 	       Nor should we record any register that is in a small
   2266 	       class, as defined by TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P.  */
   2267 	    bool record;
   2268 
   2269 	    if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   2270 	      record = true;
   2271 	    else if (x == frame_pointer_rtx
   2272 		     || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
   2273 		     || x == arg_pointer_rtx
   2274 		     || x == stack_pointer_rtx
   2275 		     || x == pic_offset_table_rtx)
   2276 	      record = true;
   2277 	    else if (global_regs[regno])
   2278 	      record = false;
   2279 	    else if (fixed_regs[regno])
   2280 	      record = true;
   2281 	    else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_CC)
   2282 	      record = true;
   2283 	    else if (targetm.small_register_classes_for_mode_p (GET_MODE (x)))
   2284 	      record = false;
   2285 	    else if (targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno)))
   2286 	      record = false;
   2287 	    else
   2288 	      record = true;
   2289 
   2290 	    if (!record)
   2291 	      {
   2292 		*do_not_record_p = 1;
   2293 		return 0;
   2294 	      }
   2295 	  }
   2296 
   2297 	hash += ((unsigned int) REG << 7);
   2298         hash += (have_reg_qty ? (unsigned) REG_QTY (regno) : regno);
   2299 	return hash;
   2300       }
   2301 
   2302     /* We handle SUBREG of a REG specially because the underlying
   2303        reg changes its hash value with every value change; we don't
   2304        want to have to forget unrelated subregs when one subreg changes.  */
   2305     case SUBREG:
   2306       {
   2307 	if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
   2308 	  {
   2309 	    hash += (((unsigned int) SUBREG << 7)
   2310 		     + REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))
   2311 		     + (constant_lower_bound (SUBREG_BYTE (x))
   2312 			/ UNITS_PER_WORD));
   2313 	    return hash;
   2314 	  }
   2315 	break;
   2316       }
   2317 
   2318     case CONST_INT:
   2319       hash += (((unsigned int) CONST_INT << 7) + (unsigned int) mode
   2320                + (unsigned int) INTVAL (x));
   2321       return hash;
   2322 
   2323     case CONST_WIDE_INT:
   2324       for (i = 0; i < CONST_WIDE_INT_NUNITS (x); i++)
   2325 	hash += CONST_WIDE_INT_ELT (x, i);
   2326       return hash;
   2327 
   2328     case CONST_POLY_INT:
   2329       {
   2330 	inchash::hash h;
   2331 	h.add_int (hash);
   2332 	for (unsigned int i = 0; i < NUM_POLY_INT_COEFFS; ++i)
   2333 	  h.add_wide_int (CONST_POLY_INT_COEFFS (x)[i]);
   2334 	return h.end ();
   2335       }
   2336 
   2337     case CONST_DOUBLE:
   2338       /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
   2339 	 the integers representing the constant.  */
   2340       hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
   2341       if (TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT == 0 && GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
   2342 	hash += ((unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x)
   2343 		 + (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x));
   2344       else
   2345 	hash += real_hash (CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (x));
   2346       return hash;
   2347 
   2348     case CONST_FIXED:
   2349       hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
   2350       hash += fixed_hash (CONST_FIXED_VALUE (x));
   2351       return hash;
   2352 
   2353     case CONST_VECTOR:
   2354       {
   2355 	int units;
   2356 	rtx elt;
   2357 
   2358 	units = const_vector_encoded_nelts (x);
   2359 
   2360 	for (i = 0; i < units; ++i)
   2361 	  {
   2362 	    elt = CONST_VECTOR_ENCODED_ELT (x, i);
   2363 	    hash += hash_rtx_cb (elt, GET_MODE (elt),
   2364                                  do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
   2365                                  have_reg_qty, cb);
   2366 	  }
   2367 
   2368 	return hash;
   2369       }
   2370 
   2371       /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label.  */
   2372     case LABEL_REF:
   2373       /* We don't hash on the address of the CODE_LABEL to avoid bootstrap
   2374 	 differences and differences between each stage's debugging dumps.  */
   2375 	 hash += (((unsigned int) LABEL_REF << 7)
   2376 		  + CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (label_ref_label (x)));
   2377       return hash;
   2378 
   2379     case SYMBOL_REF:
   2380       {
   2381 	/* Don't hash on the symbol's address to avoid bootstrap differences.
   2382 	   Different hash values may cause expressions to be recorded in
   2383 	   different orders and thus different registers to be used in the
   2384 	   final assembler.  This also avoids differences in the dump files
   2385 	   between various stages.  */
   2386 	unsigned int h = 0;
   2387 	const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) XSTR (x, 0);
   2388 
   2389 	while (*p)
   2390 	  h += (h << 7) + *p++; /* ??? revisit */
   2391 
   2392 	hash += ((unsigned int) SYMBOL_REF << 7) + h;
   2393 	return hash;
   2394       }
   2395 
   2396     case MEM:
   2397       /* We don't record if marked volatile or if BLKmode since we don't
   2398 	 know the size of the move.  */
   2399       if (do_not_record_p && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode))
   2400 	{
   2401 	  *do_not_record_p = 1;
   2402 	  return 0;
   2403 	}
   2404       if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
   2405 	*hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
   2406 
   2407       /* Now that we have already found this special case,
   2408 	 might as well speed it up as much as possible.  */
   2409       hash += (unsigned) MEM;
   2410       x = XEXP (x, 0);
   2411       goto repeat;
   2412 
   2413     case USE:
   2414       /* A USE that mentions non-volatile memory needs special
   2415 	 handling since the MEM may be BLKmode which normally
   2416 	 prevents an entry from being made.  Pure calls are
   2417 	 marked by a USE which mentions BLKmode memory.
   2418 	 See calls.cc:emit_call_1.  */
   2419       if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
   2420 	  && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
   2421 	{
   2422 	  hash += (unsigned) USE;
   2423 	  x = XEXP (x, 0);
   2424 
   2425 	  if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
   2426 	    *hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
   2427 
   2428 	  /* Now that we have already found this special case,
   2429 	     might as well speed it up as much as possible.  */
   2430 	  hash += (unsigned) MEM;
   2431 	  x = XEXP (x, 0);
   2432 	  goto repeat;
   2433 	}
   2434       break;
   2435 
   2436     case PRE_DEC:
   2437     case PRE_INC:
   2438     case POST_DEC:
   2439     case POST_INC:
   2440     case PRE_MODIFY:
   2441     case POST_MODIFY:
   2442     case PC:
   2443     case CALL:
   2444     case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
   2445       if (do_not_record_p) {
   2446         *do_not_record_p = 1;
   2447         return 0;
   2448       }
   2449       else
   2450         return hash;
   2451       break;
   2452 
   2453     case ASM_OPERANDS:
   2454       if (do_not_record_p && MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
   2455 	{
   2456 	  *do_not_record_p = 1;
   2457 	  return 0;
   2458 	}
   2459       else
   2460 	{
   2461 	  /* We don't want to take the filename and line into account.  */
   2462 	  hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x)
   2463 	    + hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x))
   2464 	    + hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x))
   2465 	    + (unsigned) ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x);
   2466 
   2467 	  if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
   2468 	    {
   2469 	      for (i = 1; i < ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x); i++)
   2470 		{
   2471 		  hash += (hash_rtx_cb (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
   2472                                         GET_MODE (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i)),
   2473                                         do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
   2474                                         have_reg_qty, cb)
   2475 			   + hash_rtx_string
   2476                            (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i)));
   2477 		}
   2478 
   2479 	      hash += hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, 0));
   2480 	      x = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, 0);
   2481 	      mode = GET_MODE (x);
   2482 	      goto repeat;
   2483 	    }
   2484 
   2485 	  return hash;
   2486 	}
   2487       break;
   2488 
   2489     default:
   2490       break;
   2491     }
   2492 
   2493   i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
   2494   hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
   2495   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
   2496   for (; i >= 0; i--)
   2497     {
   2498       switch (fmt[i])
   2499 	{
   2500 	case 'e':
   2501 	  /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
   2502 	     needed at this level, change it into iteration.
   2503 	     This function  is called enough to be worth it.  */
   2504 	  if (i == 0)
   2505 	    {
   2506 	      x = XEXP (x, i);
   2507 	      goto repeat;
   2508 	    }
   2509 
   2510 	  hash += hash_rtx_cb (XEXP (x, i), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
   2511                                hash_arg_in_memory_p,
   2512                                have_reg_qty, cb);
   2513 	  break;
   2514 
   2515 	case 'E':
   2516 	  for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
   2517 	    hash += hash_rtx_cb (XVECEXP (x, i, j), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
   2518                                  hash_arg_in_memory_p,
   2519                                  have_reg_qty, cb);
   2520 	  break;
   2521 
   2522 	case 's':
   2523 	  hash += hash_rtx_string (XSTR (x, i));
   2524 	  break;
   2525 
   2526 	case 'i':
   2527 	  hash += (unsigned int) XINT (x, i);
   2528 	  break;
   2529 
   2530 	case 'p':
   2531 	  hash += constant_lower_bound (SUBREG_BYTE (x));
   2532 	  break;
   2533 
   2534 	case '0': case 't':
   2535 	  /* Unused.  */
   2536 	  break;
   2537 
   2538 	default:
   2539 	  gcc_unreachable ();
   2540 	}
   2541     }
   2542 
   2543   return hash;
   2544 }
   2545 
   2546 /* Hash an rtx.  We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
   2547    Equivalent registers hash identically.
   2548    MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
   2549    otherwise the mode of X is used.
   2550 
   2551    Store 1 in DO_NOT_RECORD_P if any subexpression is volatile.
   2552 
   2553    If HASH_ARG_IN_MEMORY_P is not NULL, store 1 in it if X contains
   2554    a MEM rtx which does not have the MEM_READONLY_P flag set.
   2555 
   2556    Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
   2557    is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address.  */
   2558 
   2559 unsigned
   2560 hash_rtx (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode, int *do_not_record_p,
   2561 	  int *hash_arg_in_memory_p, bool have_reg_qty)
   2562 {
   2563   return hash_rtx_cb (x, mode, do_not_record_p,
   2564                       hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, NULL);
   2565 }
   2566 
   2567 /* Hash an rtx X for cse via hash_rtx.
   2568    Stores 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
   2569    Stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a mem rtx which
   2570    does not have the MEM_READONLY_P flag set.  */
   2571 
   2572 static inline unsigned
   2573 canon_hash (rtx x, machine_mode mode)
   2574 {
   2575   return hash_rtx (x, mode, &do_not_record, &hash_arg_in_memory, true);
   2576 }
   2577 
   2578 /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects, i.e. do_not_record
   2579    and hash_arg_in_memory are not changed.  */
   2580 
   2581 static inline unsigned
   2582 safe_hash (rtx x, machine_mode mode)
   2583 {
   2584   int dummy_do_not_record;
   2585   return hash_rtx (x, mode, &dummy_do_not_record, NULL, true);
   2586 }
   2587 
   2588 /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
   2590    without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
   2591    If VALIDATE is nonzero,
   2592    we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
   2593    and Y was found in the hash table.  We check register refs
   2594    in Y for being marked as valid.
   2595 
   2596    If FOR_GCSE is true, we compare X and Y for equivalence for GCSE.  */
   2597 
   2598 int
   2599 exp_equiv_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx y, int validate, bool for_gcse)
   2600 {
   2601   int i, j;
   2602   enum rtx_code code;
   2603   const char *fmt;
   2604 
   2605   /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
   2606      if VALIDATE is nonzero.  */
   2607   if (x == y && !validate)
   2608     return 1;
   2609 
   2610   if (x == 0 || y == 0)
   2611     return x == y;
   2612 
   2613   code = GET_CODE (x);
   2614   if (code != GET_CODE (y))
   2615     return 0;
   2616 
   2617   /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent.  */
   2618   if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
   2619     return 0;
   2620 
   2621   /* MEMs referring to different address space are not equivalent.  */
   2622   if (code == MEM && MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x) != MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y))
   2623     return 0;
   2624 
   2625   switch (code)
   2626     {
   2627     case PC:
   2628     CASE_CONST_UNIQUE:
   2629       return x == y;
   2630 
   2631     case CONST_VECTOR:
   2632       if (!same_vector_encodings_p (x, y))
   2633 	return false;
   2634       break;
   2635 
   2636     case LABEL_REF:
   2637       return label_ref_label (x) == label_ref_label (y);
   2638 
   2639     case SYMBOL_REF:
   2640       return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
   2641 
   2642     case REG:
   2643       if (for_gcse)
   2644 	return REGNO (x) == REGNO (y);
   2645       else
   2646 	{
   2647 	  unsigned int regno = REGNO (y);
   2648 	  unsigned int i;
   2649 	  unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (y);
   2650 
   2651 	  /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
   2652 	     equivalent.  If there are and we are not to validate, they
   2653 	     are equivalent.  Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date.  */
   2654 
   2655 	  if (REG_QTY (REGNO (x)) != REG_QTY (regno))
   2656 	    return 0;
   2657 
   2658 	  if (! validate)
   2659 	    return 1;
   2660 
   2661 	  for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
   2662 	    if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
   2663 	      return 0;
   2664 
   2665 	  return 1;
   2666 	}
   2667 
   2668     case MEM:
   2669       if (for_gcse)
   2670 	{
   2671 	  /* A volatile mem should not be considered equivalent to any
   2672 	     other.  */
   2673 	  if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
   2674 	    return 0;
   2675 
   2676 	  /* Can't merge two expressions in different alias sets, since we
   2677 	     can decide that the expression is transparent in a block when
   2678 	     it isn't, due to it being set with the different alias set.
   2679 
   2680 	     Also, can't merge two expressions with different MEM_ATTRS.
   2681 	     They could e.g. be two different entities allocated into the
   2682 	     same space on the stack (see e.g. PR25130).  In that case, the
   2683 	     MEM addresses can be the same, even though the two MEMs are
   2684 	     absolutely not equivalent.
   2685 
   2686 	     But because really all MEM attributes should be the same for
   2687 	     equivalent MEMs, we just use the invariant that MEMs that have
   2688 	     the same attributes share the same mem_attrs data structure.  */
   2689 	  if (!mem_attrs_eq_p (MEM_ATTRS (x), MEM_ATTRS (y)))
   2690 	    return 0;
   2691 
   2692 	  /* If we are handling exceptions, we cannot consider two expressions
   2693 	     with different trapping status as equivalent, because simple_mem
   2694 	     might accept one and reject the other.  */
   2695 	  if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
   2696 	      && (MEM_NOTRAP_P (x) != MEM_NOTRAP_P (y)))
   2697 	    return 0;
   2698 	}
   2699       break;
   2700 
   2701     /*  For commutative operations, check both orders.  */
   2702     case PLUS:
   2703     case MULT:
   2704     case AND:
   2705     case IOR:
   2706     case XOR:
   2707     case NE:
   2708     case EQ:
   2709       return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0),
   2710 			     validate, for_gcse)
   2711 	       && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
   2712 				validate, for_gcse))
   2713 	      || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
   2714 				validate, for_gcse)
   2715 		  && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
   2716 				   validate, for_gcse)));
   2717 
   2718     case ASM_OPERANDS:
   2719       /* We don't use the generic code below because we want to
   2720 	 disregard filename and line numbers.  */
   2721 
   2722       /* A volatile asm isn't equivalent to any other.  */
   2723       if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
   2724 	return 0;
   2725 
   2726       if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y)
   2727 	  || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x), ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (y))
   2728 	  || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x),
   2729 		     ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (y))
   2730 	  || ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (y)
   2731 	  || ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (y))
   2732 	return 0;
   2733 
   2734       if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
   2735 	{
   2736 	  for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   2737 	    if (! exp_equiv_p (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
   2738 			       ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (y, i),
   2739 			       validate, for_gcse)
   2740 		|| strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i),
   2741 			   ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (y, i)))
   2742 	      return 0;
   2743 	}
   2744 
   2745       return 1;
   2746 
   2747     default:
   2748       break;
   2749     }
   2750 
   2751   /* Compare the elements.  If any pair of corresponding elements
   2752      fail to match, return 0 for the whole thing.  */
   2753 
   2754   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
   2755   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   2756     {
   2757       switch (fmt[i])
   2758 	{
   2759 	case 'e':
   2760 	  if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i),
   2761 			      validate, for_gcse))
   2762 	    return 0;
   2763 	  break;
   2764 
   2765 	case 'E':
   2766 	  if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
   2767 	    return 0;
   2768 	  for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
   2769 	    if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
   2770 				validate, for_gcse))
   2771 	      return 0;
   2772 	  break;
   2773 
   2774 	case 's':
   2775 	  if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
   2776 	    return 0;
   2777 	  break;
   2778 
   2779 	case 'i':
   2780 	  if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
   2781 	    return 0;
   2782 	  break;
   2783 
   2784 	case 'w':
   2785 	  if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
   2786 	    return 0;
   2787 	  break;
   2788 
   2789 	case 'p':
   2790 	  if (maybe_ne (SUBREG_BYTE (x), SUBREG_BYTE (y)))
   2791 	    return 0;
   2792 	  break;
   2793 
   2794 	case '0':
   2795 	case 't':
   2796 	  break;
   2797 
   2798 	default:
   2799 	  gcc_unreachable ();
   2800 	}
   2801     }
   2802 
   2803   return 1;
   2804 }
   2805 
   2806 /* Subroutine of canon_reg.  Pass *XLOC through canon_reg, and validate
   2808    the result if necessary.  INSN is as for canon_reg.  */
   2809 
   2810 static void
   2811 validate_canon_reg (rtx *xloc, rtx_insn *insn)
   2812 {
   2813   if (*xloc)
   2814     {
   2815       rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (*xloc, insn);
   2816 
   2817       /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
   2818          insn remains valid.  Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs.  */
   2819       gcc_assert (insn && new_rtx);
   2820       validate_change (insn, xloc, new_rtx, 1);
   2821     }
   2822 }
   2823 
   2824 /* Canonicalize an expression:
   2825    replace each register reference inside it
   2826    with the "oldest" equivalent register.
   2827 
   2828    If INSN is nonzero validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
   2829    after we make our substitution.  The calls are made with IN_GROUP nonzero
   2830    so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
   2831    function (unless INSN is zero).  The result of apply_change_group can
   2832    generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional.  */
   2833 
   2834 static rtx
   2835 canon_reg (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
   2836 {
   2837   int i;
   2838   enum rtx_code code;
   2839   const char *fmt;
   2840 
   2841   if (x == 0)
   2842     return x;
   2843 
   2844   code = GET_CODE (x);
   2845   switch (code)
   2846     {
   2847     case PC:
   2848     case CONST:
   2849     CASE_CONST_ANY:
   2850     case SYMBOL_REF:
   2851     case LABEL_REF:
   2852     case ADDR_VEC:
   2853     case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
   2854       return x;
   2855 
   2856     case REG:
   2857       {
   2858 	int first;
   2859 	int q;
   2860 	struct qty_table_elem *ent;
   2861 
   2862 	/* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
   2863 	   in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
   2864 	   of each occurrence.  Also, some hard regs appear in
   2865 	   MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered.  Don't try to
   2866 	   replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS.  */
   2867 	if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
   2868 	    || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
   2869 	  return x;
   2870 
   2871 	q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
   2872 	ent = &qty_table[q];
   2873 	first = ent->first_reg;
   2874 	return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
   2875 		: REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
   2876 		: gen_rtx_REG (ent->mode, first));
   2877       }
   2878 
   2879     default:
   2880       break;
   2881     }
   2882 
   2883   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
   2884   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   2885     {
   2886       int j;
   2887 
   2888       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
   2889 	validate_canon_reg (&XEXP (x, i), insn);
   2890       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
   2891 	for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
   2892 	  validate_canon_reg (&XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
   2893     }
   2894 
   2895   return x;
   2896 }
   2897 
   2898 /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
   2900    operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
   2901    what values are being compared.
   2902 
   2903    *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
   2904    actually being compared.  For example, if *PARG1 was (reg:CC CC_REG) and
   2905    *PARG2 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that
   2906    were compared to produce (reg:CC CC_REG).
   2907 
   2908    The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
   2909    A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison.  */
   2910 
   2911 static enum rtx_code
   2912 find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code code, rtx *parg1, rtx *parg2,
   2913 		      machine_mode *pmode1, machine_mode *pmode2)
   2914 {
   2915   rtx arg1, arg2;
   2916   hash_set<rtx> *visited = NULL;
   2917   /* Set nonzero when we find something of interest.  */
   2918   rtx x = NULL;
   2919 
   2920   arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
   2921 
   2922   /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to.  */
   2923 
   2924   while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
   2925     {
   2926       int reverse_code = 0;
   2927       struct table_elt *p = 0;
   2928 
   2929       /* Remember state from previous iteration.  */
   2930       if (x)
   2931 	{
   2932 	  if (!visited)
   2933 	    visited = new hash_set<rtx>;
   2934 	  visited->add (x);
   2935 	  x = 0;
   2936 	}
   2937 
   2938       /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.  */
   2939 
   2940       if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
   2941 	x = arg1;
   2942 
   2943       /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
   2944 	 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments.  */
   2945 
   2946       else if (COMPARISON_P (arg1))
   2947 	{
   2948 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   2949 	  REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
   2950 #endif
   2951 
   2952 	  if (code == NE
   2953 	      || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
   2954 		  && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
   2955 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   2956 	      || (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
   2957 		  && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
   2958 		      REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
   2959 #endif
   2960 	      )
   2961 	    x = arg1;
   2962 	  else if (code == EQ
   2963 		   || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
   2964 		       && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
   2965 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   2966 		   || (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
   2967 		       && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
   2968 			   REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
   2969 #endif
   2970 		   )
   2971 	    x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
   2972 	}
   2973 
   2974       /* ??? We could also check for
   2975 
   2976 	 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
   2977 
   2978 	 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring.  */
   2979 
   2980       if (x == 0)
   2981 	/* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
   2982 	   that lets us see what is being compared.  */
   2983 	p = lookup (arg1, SAFE_HASH (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)), GET_MODE (arg1));
   2984       if (p)
   2985 	{
   2986 	  p = p->first_same_value;
   2987 
   2988 	  /* If what we compare is already known to be constant, that is as
   2989 	     good as it gets.
   2990 	     We need to break the loop in this case, because otherwise we
   2991 	     can have an infinite loop when looking at a reg that is known
   2992 	     to be a constant which is the same as a comparison of a reg
   2993 	     against zero which appears later in the insn stream, which in
   2994 	     turn is constant and the same as the comparison of the first reg
   2995 	     against zero...  */
   2996 	  if (p->is_const)
   2997 	    break;
   2998 	}
   2999 
   3000       for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   3001 	{
   3002 	  machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
   3003 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   3004 	  REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
   3005 #endif
   3006 
   3007 	  /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it.  */
   3008 	  if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
   3009 	    continue;
   3010 
   3011 	  /* If it's a comparison we've used before, skip it.  */
   3012 	  if (visited && visited->contains (p->exp))
   3013 	    continue;
   3014 
   3015 	  if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
   3016 	      /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
   3017 		 that includes the comparison code.  In that case, ARG1 would
   3018 		 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
   3019 		 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero.  If this is an NE operation,
   3020 		 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
   3021 		 we must reverse ORIG_CODE.  On machine with a negative value
   3022 		 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations.  */
   3023 	      || ((code == NE
   3024 		   || (code == LT
   3025 		       && val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
   3026 						   STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
   3027 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   3028 		   || (code == LT
   3029 		       && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
   3030 		       && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
   3031 			   REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
   3032 #endif
   3033 		   )
   3034 		  && COMPARISON_P (p->exp)))
   3035 	    {
   3036 	      x = p->exp;
   3037 	      break;
   3038 	    }
   3039 	  else if ((code == EQ
   3040 		    || (code == GE
   3041 			&& val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
   3042 						    STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
   3043 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   3044 		    || (code == GE
   3045 			&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
   3046 			&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
   3047 			    REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
   3048 #endif
   3049 		    )
   3050 		   && COMPARISON_P (p->exp))
   3051 	    {
   3052 	      reverse_code = 1;
   3053 	      x = p->exp;
   3054 	      break;
   3055 	    }
   3056 
   3057 	  /* If this non-trapping address, e.g. fp + constant, the
   3058 	     equivalent is a better operand since it may let us predict
   3059 	     the value of the comparison.  */
   3060 	  else if (!rtx_addr_can_trap_p (p->exp))
   3061 	    {
   3062 	      arg1 = p->exp;
   3063 	      continue;
   3064 	    }
   3065 	}
   3066 
   3067       /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
   3068 	 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration.  */
   3069       if (x == 0)
   3070 	break;
   3071 
   3072       /* If we need to reverse the comparison, make sure that is
   3073 	 possible -- we can't necessarily infer the value of GE from LT
   3074 	 with floating-point operands.  */
   3075       if (reverse_code)
   3076 	{
   3077 	  enum rtx_code reversed = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL);
   3078 	  if (reversed == UNKNOWN)
   3079 	    break;
   3080 	  else
   3081 	    code = reversed;
   3082 	}
   3083       else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
   3084 	code = GET_CODE (x);
   3085       arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
   3086     }
   3087 
   3088   /* Return our results.  Return the modes from before fold_rtx
   3089      because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late.  */
   3090   *pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
   3091   *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
   3092 
   3093   if (visited)
   3094     delete visited;
   3095   return code;
   3096 }
   3097 
   3098 /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument for which
   3100    a constant value can be determined, return the result of operating
   3101    on that value, as a constant.  Otherwise, return X, possibly with
   3102    one or more operands changed to a forward-propagated constant.
   3103 
   3104    If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT return
   3105    those contents here; equiv_constant is called to perform that task.
   3106    For SUBREGs and MEMs, we do that both here and in equiv_constant.
   3107 
   3108    INSN is the insn that we may be modifying.  If it is 0, make a copy
   3109    of X before modifying it.  */
   3110 
   3111 static rtx
   3112 fold_rtx (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
   3113 {
   3114   enum rtx_code code;
   3115   machine_mode mode;
   3116   const char *fmt;
   3117   int i;
   3118   rtx new_rtx = 0;
   3119   int changed = 0;
   3120   poly_int64 xval;
   3121 
   3122   /* Operands of X.  */
   3123   /* Workaround -Wmaybe-uninitialized false positive during
   3124      profiledbootstrap by initializing them.  */
   3125   rtx folded_arg0 = NULL_RTX;
   3126   rtx folded_arg1 = NULL_RTX;
   3127 
   3128   /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
   3129      0 when no such equivalent is known.  */
   3130   rtx const_arg0;
   3131   rtx const_arg1;
   3132   rtx const_arg2;
   3133 
   3134   /* The mode of the first operand of X.  We need this for sign and zero
   3135      extends.  */
   3136   machine_mode mode_arg0;
   3137 
   3138   if (x == 0)
   3139     return x;
   3140 
   3141   /* Try to perform some initial simplifications on X.  */
   3142   code = GET_CODE (x);
   3143   switch (code)
   3144     {
   3145     case MEM:
   3146     case SUBREG:
   3147     /* The first operand of a SIGN/ZERO_EXTRACT has a different meaning
   3148        than it would in other contexts.  Basically its mode does not
   3149        signify the size of the object read.  That information is carried
   3150        by size operand.    If we happen to have a MEM of the appropriate
   3151        mode in our tables with a constant value we could simplify the
   3152        extraction incorrectly if we allowed substitution of that value
   3153        for the MEM.   */
   3154     case ZERO_EXTRACT:
   3155     case SIGN_EXTRACT:
   3156       if ((new_rtx = equiv_constant (x)) != NULL_RTX)
   3157         return new_rtx;
   3158       return x;
   3159 
   3160     case CONST:
   3161     CASE_CONST_ANY:
   3162     case SYMBOL_REF:
   3163     case LABEL_REF:
   3164     case REG:
   3165     case PC:
   3166       /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
   3167 	 since they are used only for lists of args
   3168 	 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note.  */
   3169     case EXPR_LIST:
   3170       return x;
   3171 
   3172     case ASM_OPERANDS:
   3173       if (insn)
   3174 	{
   3175 	  for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   3176 	    validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
   3177 			     fold_rtx (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), insn), 0);
   3178 	}
   3179       return x;
   3180 
   3181     case CALL:
   3182       if (NO_FUNCTION_CSE && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
   3183 	return x;
   3184       break;
   3185     case VEC_SELECT:
   3186       {
   3187 	rtx trueop0 = XEXP (x, 0);
   3188 	mode = GET_MODE (trueop0);
   3189 	rtx trueop1 = XEXP (x, 1);
   3190 	/* If we select a low-part subreg, return that.  */
   3191 	if (vec_series_lowpart_p (GET_MODE (x), mode, trueop1))
   3192 	  {
   3193 	    rtx new_rtx = lowpart_subreg (GET_MODE (x), trueop0, mode);
   3194 	    if (new_rtx != NULL_RTX)
   3195 	      return new_rtx;
   3196 	  }
   3197       }
   3198 
   3199     /* Anything else goes through the loop below.  */
   3200     default:
   3201       break;
   3202     }
   3203 
   3204   mode = GET_MODE (x);
   3205   const_arg0 = 0;
   3206   const_arg1 = 0;
   3207   const_arg2 = 0;
   3208   mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
   3209 
   3210   /* Try folding our operands.
   3211      Then see which ones have constant values known.  */
   3212 
   3213   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
   3214   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   3215     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
   3216       {
   3217 	rtx folded_arg = XEXP (x, i), const_arg;
   3218 	machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (folded_arg);
   3219 
   3220 	switch (GET_CODE (folded_arg))
   3221 	  {
   3222 	  case MEM:
   3223 	  case REG:
   3224 	  case SUBREG:
   3225 	    const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
   3226 	    break;
   3227 
   3228 	  case CONST:
   3229 	  CASE_CONST_ANY:
   3230 	  case SYMBOL_REF:
   3231 	  case LABEL_REF:
   3232 	    const_arg = folded_arg;
   3233 	    break;
   3234 
   3235 	  default:
   3236 	    folded_arg = fold_rtx (folded_arg, insn);
   3237 	    const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
   3238 	    break;
   3239 	  }
   3240 
   3241 	/* For the first three operands, see if the operand
   3242 	   is constant or equivalent to a constant.  */
   3243 	switch (i)
   3244 	  {
   3245 	  case 0:
   3246 	    folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
   3247 	    const_arg0 = const_arg;
   3248 	    mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
   3249 	    break;
   3250 	  case 1:
   3251 	    folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
   3252 	    const_arg1 = const_arg;
   3253 	    break;
   3254 	  case 2:
   3255 	    const_arg2 = const_arg;
   3256 	    break;
   3257 	  }
   3258 
   3259 	/* Pick the least expensive of the argument and an equivalent constant
   3260 	   argument.  */
   3261 	if (const_arg != 0
   3262 	    && const_arg != folded_arg
   3263 	    && (COST_IN (const_arg, mode_arg, code, i)
   3264 		<= COST_IN (folded_arg, mode_arg, code, i))
   3265 
   3266 	    /* It's not safe to substitute the operand of a conversion
   3267 	       operator with a constant, as the conversion's identity
   3268 	       depends upon the mode of its operand.  This optimization
   3269 	       is handled by the call to simplify_unary_operation.  */
   3270 	    && (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_UNARY
   3271 		|| GET_MODE (const_arg) == mode_arg0
   3272 		|| (code != ZERO_EXTEND
   3273 		    && code != SIGN_EXTEND
   3274 		    && code != TRUNCATE
   3275 		    && code != FLOAT_TRUNCATE
   3276 		    && code != FLOAT_EXTEND
   3277 		    && code != FLOAT
   3278 		    && code != FIX
   3279 		    && code != UNSIGNED_FLOAT
   3280 		    && code != UNSIGNED_FIX)))
   3281 	  folded_arg = const_arg;
   3282 
   3283 	if (folded_arg == XEXP (x, i))
   3284 	  continue;
   3285 
   3286 	if (insn == NULL_RTX && !changed)
   3287 	  x = copy_rtx (x);
   3288 	changed = 1;
   3289 	validate_unshare_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), folded_arg, 1);
   3290       }
   3291 
   3292   if (changed)
   3293     {
   3294       /* Canonicalize X if necessary, and keep const_argN and folded_argN
   3295 	 consistent with the order in X.  */
   3296       if (canonicalize_change_group (insn, x))
   3297 	{
   3298 	  std::swap (const_arg0, const_arg1);
   3299 	  std::swap (folded_arg0, folded_arg1);
   3300 	}
   3301 
   3302       apply_change_group ();
   3303     }
   3304 
   3305   /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it.  */
   3306 
   3307   switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
   3308     {
   3309     case RTX_UNARY:
   3310       {
   3311 	/* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the
   3312 	   original mode.  */
   3313 	if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
   3314 	    && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
   3315 	  break;
   3316 
   3317 	new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
   3318 					    const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
   3319 					    mode_arg0);
   3320       }
   3321       break;
   3322 
   3323     case RTX_COMPARE:
   3324     case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
   3325       /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
   3326 	 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code.  If any are
   3327 	 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately.  We needn't
   3328 	 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant.  */
   3329 
   3330       /* ??? Vector mode comparisons are not supported yet.  */
   3331       if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
   3332 	break;
   3333 
   3334       if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
   3335 	{
   3336 	  struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
   3337 	  rtx true_rtx, false_rtx;
   3338 	  machine_mode mode_arg1;
   3339 
   3340 	  if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
   3341 	    {
   3342 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
   3343 	      true_rtx = (const_double_from_real_value
   3344 			  (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (mode), mode));
   3345 #else
   3346 	      true_rtx = NULL_RTX;
   3347 #endif
   3348 	      false_rtx = CONST0_RTX (mode);
   3349 	    }
   3350 	  else
   3351 	    {
   3352 	      true_rtx = const_true_rtx;
   3353 	      false_rtx = const0_rtx;
   3354 	    }
   3355 
   3356 	  code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
   3357 				       &mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
   3358 
   3359 	  /* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
   3360 	     what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
   3361 	     anything with this comparison.  */
   3362 
   3363 	  if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
   3364 	    break;
   3365 
   3366 	  const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
   3367 	  const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
   3368 
   3369 	  /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see
   3370 	     if we can nevertheless deduce some things about the
   3371 	     comparison.  */
   3372 	  if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
   3373 	    {
   3374 	      if (const_arg1 != NULL)
   3375 		{
   3376 		  rtx cheapest_simplification;
   3377 		  int cheapest_cost;
   3378 		  rtx simp_result;
   3379 		  struct table_elt *p;
   3380 
   3381 		  /* See if we can find an equivalent of folded_arg0
   3382 		     that gets us a cheaper expression, possibly a
   3383 		     constant through simplifications.  */
   3384 		  p = lookup (folded_arg0, SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
   3385 			      mode_arg0);
   3386 
   3387 		  if (p != NULL)
   3388 		    {
   3389 		      cheapest_simplification = x;
   3390 		      cheapest_cost = COST (x, mode);
   3391 
   3392 		      for (p = p->first_same_value; p != NULL; p = p->next_same_value)
   3393 			{
   3394 			  int cost;
   3395 
   3396 			  /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it.  */
   3397 			  if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
   3398 			    continue;
   3399 
   3400 			  /* Try to simplify using this equivalence.  */
   3401 			  simp_result
   3402 			    = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode,
   3403 							     mode_arg0,
   3404 							     p->exp,
   3405 							     const_arg1);
   3406 
   3407 			  if (simp_result == NULL)
   3408 			    continue;
   3409 
   3410 			  cost = COST (simp_result, mode);
   3411 			  if (cost < cheapest_cost)
   3412 			    {
   3413 			      cheapest_cost = cost;
   3414 			      cheapest_simplification = simp_result;
   3415 			    }
   3416 			}
   3417 
   3418 		      /* If we have a cheaper expression now, use that
   3419 			 and try folding it further, from the top.  */
   3420 		      if (cheapest_simplification != x)
   3421 			return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (cheapest_simplification),
   3422 					 insn);
   3423 		    }
   3424 		}
   3425 
   3426 	      /* See if the two operands are the same.  */
   3427 
   3428 	      if ((REG_P (folded_arg0)
   3429 		   && REG_P (folded_arg1)
   3430 		   && (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0))
   3431 		       == REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1))))
   3432 		  || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
   3433 				    SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
   3434 				    mode_arg0))
   3435 		      && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
   3436 				       SAFE_HASH (folded_arg1, mode_arg0),
   3437 				       mode_arg0))
   3438 		      && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value))
   3439 		folded_arg1 = folded_arg0;
   3440 
   3441 	      /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
   3442 		 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
   3443 		 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point).  */
   3444 	      else if (REG_P (folded_arg0))
   3445 		{
   3446 		  int qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0));
   3447 
   3448 		  if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0)))
   3449 		    {
   3450 		      struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[qty];
   3451 
   3452 		      if ((comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code)
   3453 			   || (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0)
   3454 			       && comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code,
   3455 						          reverse_condition (code))))
   3456 			  && (rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const, folded_arg1)
   3457 			      || (const_arg1
   3458 				  && rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const,
   3459 						  const_arg1))
   3460 			      || (REG_P (folded_arg1)
   3461 				  && (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1)) == ent->comparison_qty))))
   3462 			{
   3463 			  if (comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code))
   3464 			    {
   3465 			      if (true_rtx)
   3466 				return true_rtx;
   3467 			      else
   3468 				break;
   3469 			    }
   3470 			  else
   3471 			    return false_rtx;
   3472 			}
   3473 		    }
   3474 		}
   3475 	    }
   3476 	}
   3477 
   3478       /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
   3479 	 equivalent to an IOR with a constant.  If so, we may be able to
   3480 	 determine the result of this comparison.  */
   3481       if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx && !const_arg0)
   3482 	{
   3483 	  rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
   3484 	  rtx inner_const;
   3485 
   3486 	  if (y != 0
   3487 	      && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
   3488 	      && CONST_INT_P (inner_const)
   3489 	      && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
   3490 	    folded_arg0 = gen_rtx_IOR (mode_arg0, XEXP (y, 0), inner_const);
   3491 	}
   3492 
   3493       {
   3494 	rtx op0 = const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : copy_rtx (folded_arg0);
   3495 	rtx op1 = const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : copy_rtx (folded_arg1);
   3496 	new_rtx = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
   3497 						 op0, op1);
   3498       }
   3499       break;
   3500 
   3501     case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
   3502     case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
   3503       switch (code)
   3504 	{
   3505 	case PLUS:
   3506 	  /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
   3507 	     with that LABEL_REF as its second operand.  If so, the result is
   3508 	     the first operand of that MINUS.  This handles switches with an
   3509 	     ADDR_DIFF_VEC table.  */
   3510 	  if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
   3511 	    {
   3512 	      rtx y
   3513 		= GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == MINUS ? folded_arg0
   3514 		: lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
   3515 
   3516 	      if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
   3517 		  && label_ref_label (XEXP (y, 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg1))
   3518 		return XEXP (y, 0);
   3519 
   3520 	      /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above.  */
   3521 	      if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST ? folded_arg0
   3522 			: lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, CONST))) != 0
   3523 		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
   3524 		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
   3525 		  && label_ref_label (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg1))
   3526 		return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
   3527 	    }
   3528 
   3529 	  /* Likewise if the operands are in the other order.  */
   3530 	  if (const_arg0 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == LABEL_REF)
   3531 	    {
   3532 	      rtx y
   3533 		= GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == MINUS ? folded_arg1
   3534 		: lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, MINUS);
   3535 
   3536 	      if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
   3537 		  && label_ref_label (XEXP (y, 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg0))
   3538 		return XEXP (y, 0);
   3539 
   3540 	      /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above.  */
   3541 	      if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == CONST ? folded_arg1
   3542 			: lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, CONST))) != 0
   3543 		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
   3544 		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
   3545 		  && label_ref_label (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg0))
   3546 		return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
   3547 	    }
   3548 
   3549 	  /* If second operand is a register equivalent to a negative
   3550 	     CONST_INT, see if we can find a register equivalent to the
   3551 	     positive constant.  Make a MINUS if so.  Don't do this for
   3552 	     a non-negative constant since we might then alternate between
   3553 	     choosing positive and negative constants.  Having the positive
   3554 	     constant previously-used is the more common case.  Be sure
   3555 	     the resulting constant is non-negative; if const_arg1 were
   3556 	     the smallest negative number this would overflow: depending
   3557 	     on the mode, this would either just be the same value (and
   3558 	     hence not save anything) or be incorrect.  */
   3559 	  if (const_arg1 != 0 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1)
   3560 	      && INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0
   3561 	      /* This used to test
   3562 
   3563 	         -INTVAL (const_arg1) >= 0
   3564 
   3565 		 But The Sun V5.0 compilers mis-compiled that test.  So
   3566 		 instead we test for the problematic value in a more direct
   3567 		 manner and hope the Sun compilers get it correct.  */
   3568 	      && INTVAL (const_arg1) !=
   3569 	        (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1))
   3570 	      && REG_P (folded_arg1))
   3571 	    {
   3572 	      rtx new_const = GEN_INT (-INTVAL (const_arg1));
   3573 	      struct table_elt *p
   3574 		= lookup (new_const, SAFE_HASH (new_const, mode), mode);
   3575 
   3576 	      if (p)
   3577 		for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   3578 		  if (REG_P (p->exp))
   3579 		    return simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, folded_arg0,
   3580 						canon_reg (p->exp, NULL));
   3581 	    }
   3582 	  goto from_plus;
   3583 
   3584 	case MINUS:
   3585 	  /* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
   3586 	     If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C).  */
   3587 	  if (const_arg1 != 0 && poly_int_rtx_p (const_arg1, &xval))
   3588 	    {
   3589 	      rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
   3590 	      if (y && poly_int_rtx_p (XEXP (y, 1)))
   3591 		return fold_rtx (plus_constant (mode, copy_rtx (y), -xval),
   3592 				 NULL);
   3593 	    }
   3594 
   3595 	  /* Fall through.  */
   3596 
   3597 	from_plus:
   3598 	case SMIN:    case SMAX:      case UMIN:    case UMAX:
   3599 	case IOR:     case AND:       case XOR:
   3600 	case MULT:
   3601 	case ASHIFT:  case LSHIFTRT:  case ASHIFTRT:
   3602 	  /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
   3603 	     is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
   3604 	     operation with a combined operation.  This may eliminate the
   3605 	     intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
   3606 	     Note that the similar optimization done by combine.cc only works
   3607 	     if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference.  */
   3608 
   3609 	  if (REG_P (folded_arg0)
   3610 	      && const_arg1 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1))
   3611 	    {
   3612 	      int is_shift
   3613 		= (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
   3614 	      rtx y, inner_const, new_const;
   3615 	      rtx canon_const_arg1 = const_arg1;
   3616 	      enum rtx_code associate_code;
   3617 
   3618 	      if (is_shift
   3619 		  && (INTVAL (const_arg1) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode)
   3620 		      || INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0))
   3621 		{
   3622 		  if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
   3623 		    canon_const_arg1 = gen_int_shift_amount
   3624 		      (mode, (INTVAL (const_arg1)
   3625 			      & (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)));
   3626 		  else
   3627 		    break;
   3628 		}
   3629 
   3630 	      y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
   3631 	      if (y == 0)
   3632 		break;
   3633 
   3634 	      /* If we have compiled a statement like
   3635 		 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
   3636 		 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
   3637 		 of Y is the same as our first operand.  Unless we detect
   3638 		 this case, an infinite loop will result.  */
   3639 	      if (XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
   3640 		break;
   3641 
   3642 	      inner_const = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0));
   3643 	      if (!inner_const || !CONST_INT_P (inner_const))
   3644 		break;
   3645 
   3646 	      /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
   3647 		 same constant and it is a power of two.  These might be doable
   3648 		 with a pre- or post-increment.  Similarly for two subtracts of
   3649 		 identical powers of two with post decrement.  */
   3650 
   3651 	      if (code == PLUS && const_arg1 == inner_const
   3652 		  && ((HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
   3653 			  && pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (const_arg1)))
   3654 		      || (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
   3655 			  && pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (const_arg1)))
   3656 		      || (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
   3657 			  && pow2p_hwi (- INTVAL (const_arg1)))
   3658 		      || (HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
   3659 			  && pow2p_hwi (- INTVAL (const_arg1)))))
   3660 		break;
   3661 
   3662 	      /* ??? Vector mode shifts by scalar
   3663 		 shift operand are not supported yet.  */
   3664 	      if (is_shift && VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
   3665                 break;
   3666 
   3667 	      if (is_shift
   3668 		  && (INTVAL (inner_const) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode)
   3669 		      || INTVAL (inner_const) < 0))
   3670 		{
   3671 		  if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
   3672 		    inner_const = gen_int_shift_amount
   3673 		      (mode, (INTVAL (inner_const)
   3674 			      & (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)));
   3675 		  else
   3676 		    break;
   3677 		}
   3678 
   3679 	      /* Compute the code used to compose the constants.  For example,
   3680 		 A-C1-C2 is A-(C1 + C2), so if CODE == MINUS, we want PLUS.  */
   3681 
   3682 	      associate_code = (is_shift || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
   3683 
   3684 	      new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
   3685 						     canon_const_arg1,
   3686 						     inner_const);
   3687 
   3688 	      if (new_const == 0)
   3689 		break;
   3690 
   3691 	      /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
   3692 		 produce a shift of the size of the object or larger.
   3693 		 This could occur when we follow a sign-extend by a right
   3694 		 shift on a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair
   3695 		 of shifts.  */
   3696 
   3697 	      if (is_shift
   3698 		  && CONST_INT_P (new_const)
   3699 		  && INTVAL (new_const) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode))
   3700 		{
   3701 		  /* As an exception, we can turn an ASHIFTRT of this
   3702 		     form into a shift of the number of bits - 1.  */
   3703 		  if (code == ASHIFTRT)
   3704 		    new_const = gen_int_shift_amount
   3705 		      (mode, GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
   3706 		  else if (!side_effects_p (XEXP (y, 0)))
   3707 		    return CONST0_RTX (mode);
   3708 		  else
   3709 		    break;
   3710 		}
   3711 
   3712 	      y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
   3713 
   3714 	      /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
   3715 		 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
   3716 		 loop if we tried to fold it.  So don't in that case.  */
   3717 
   3718 	      if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
   3719 		y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
   3720 
   3721 	      return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
   3722 	    }
   3723 	  break;
   3724 
   3725 	case DIV:       case UDIV:
   3726 	  /* ??? The associative optimization performed immediately above is
   3727 	     also possible for DIV and UDIV using associate_code of MULT.
   3728 	     However, we would need extra code to verify that the
   3729 	     multiplication does not overflow, that is, there is no overflow
   3730 	     in the calculation of new_const.  */
   3731 	  break;
   3732 
   3733 	default:
   3734 	  break;
   3735 	}
   3736 
   3737       new_rtx = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
   3738 				       const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
   3739 				       const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
   3740       break;
   3741 
   3742     case RTX_OBJ:
   3743       /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X.  */
   3744       if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
   3745 	  && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
   3746 	  && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
   3747 	return const_arg1;
   3748       break;
   3749 
   3750     case RTX_TERNARY:
   3751     case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
   3752       new_rtx = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
   3753 					const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
   3754 					const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
   3755 					const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
   3756       break;
   3757 
   3758     default:
   3759       break;
   3760     }
   3761 
   3762   return new_rtx ? new_rtx : x;
   3763 }
   3764 
   3765 /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
   3767    Return 0 if we don't know one.  */
   3768 
   3769 static rtx
   3770 equiv_constant (rtx x)
   3771 {
   3772   if (REG_P (x)
   3773       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
   3774     {
   3775       int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
   3776       struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
   3777 
   3778       if (x_ent->const_rtx)
   3779 	x = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), x_ent->const_rtx);
   3780     }
   3781 
   3782   if (x == 0 || CONSTANT_P (x))
   3783     return x;
   3784 
   3785   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
   3786     {
   3787       machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
   3788       machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
   3789       rtx new_rtx;
   3790 
   3791       /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG.  */
   3792       if ((new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
   3793 	  || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_WIDE_INT)) != 0
   3794 	  || (NUM_POLY_INT_COEFFS > 1
   3795 	      && (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_POLY_INT)) != 0)
   3796           || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0
   3797           || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_FIXED)) != 0)
   3798         return new_rtx;
   3799 
   3800       /* If we didn't and if doing so makes sense, see if we previously
   3801 	 assigned a constant value to the enclosing word mode SUBREG.  */
   3802       if (known_lt (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD)
   3803 	  && known_lt (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (imode)))
   3804 	{
   3805 	  poly_int64 byte = (SUBREG_BYTE (x)
   3806 			     - subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, word_mode));
   3807 	  if (known_ge (byte, 0) && multiple_p (byte, UNITS_PER_WORD))
   3808 	    {
   3809 	      rtx y = gen_rtx_SUBREG (word_mode, SUBREG_REG (x), byte);
   3810 	      new_rtx = lookup_as_function (y, CONST_INT);
   3811 	      if (new_rtx)
   3812 		return gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
   3813 	    }
   3814 	}
   3815 
   3816       /* Otherwise see if we already have a constant for the inner REG,
   3817 	 and if that is enough to calculate an equivalent constant for
   3818 	 the subreg.  Note that the upper bits of paradoxical subregs
   3819 	 are undefined, so they cannot be said to equal anything.  */
   3820       if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
   3821 	  && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
   3822 	  && (new_rtx = equiv_constant (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
   3823         return simplify_subreg (mode, new_rtx, imode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
   3824 
   3825       return 0;
   3826     }
   3827 
   3828   /* If X is a MEM, see if it is a constant-pool reference, or look it up in
   3829      the hash table in case its value was seen before.  */
   3830 
   3831   if (MEM_P (x))
   3832     {
   3833       struct table_elt *elt;
   3834 
   3835       x = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
   3836       if (CONSTANT_P (x))
   3837 	return x;
   3838 
   3839       elt = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, GET_MODE (x)), GET_MODE (x));
   3840       if (elt == 0)
   3841 	return 0;
   3842 
   3843       for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
   3844 	if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
   3845 	  return elt->exp;
   3846     }
   3847 
   3848   return 0;
   3849 }
   3850 
   3851 /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the
   3853    "taken" branch.
   3854 
   3855    In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence.  For example,
   3856    if we are following the taken case of
   3857 	if (i == 2)
   3858    we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
   3859 
   3860    In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed.  If the same
   3861    comparison is seen later, we will know its value.  */
   3862 
   3863 static void
   3864 record_jump_equiv (rtx_insn *insn, bool taken)
   3865 {
   3866   int cond_known_true;
   3867   rtx op0, op1;
   3868   rtx set;
   3869   machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
   3870   int reversed_nonequality = 0;
   3871   enum rtx_code code;
   3872 
   3873   /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn.  */
   3874   gcc_assert (any_condjump_p (insn));
   3875 
   3876   set = pc_set (insn);
   3877 
   3878   /* See if this jump condition is known true or false.  */
   3879   if (taken)
   3880     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 2) == pc_rtx);
   3881   else
   3882     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1) == pc_rtx);
   3883 
   3884   /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
   3885      If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
   3886      know that it isn't valid for floating-point.  */
   3887   code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0));
   3888   op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 0), insn);
   3889   op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 1), insn);
   3890 
   3891   /* If fold_rtx returns NULL_RTX, there's nothing to record.  */
   3892   if (op0 == NULL_RTX || op1 == NULL_RTX)
   3893     return;
   3894 
   3895   code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
   3896   if (! cond_known_true)
   3897     {
   3898       code = reversed_comparison_code_parts (code, op0, op1, insn);
   3899 
   3900       /* Don't remember if we can't find the inverse.  */
   3901       if (code == UNKNOWN)
   3902 	return;
   3903     }
   3904 
   3905   /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant.  */
   3906   mode = mode0;
   3907   if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
   3908     mode = mode1;
   3909 
   3910   record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
   3911 }
   3912 
   3913 /* Yet another form of subreg creation.  In this case, we want something in
   3914    MODE, and we should assume OP has MODE iff it is naturally modeless.  */
   3915 
   3916 static rtx
   3917 record_jump_cond_subreg (machine_mode mode, rtx op)
   3918 {
   3919   machine_mode op_mode = GET_MODE (op);
   3920   if (op_mode == mode || op_mode == VOIDmode)
   3921     return op;
   3922   return lowpart_subreg (mode, op, op_mode);
   3923 }
   3924 
   3925 /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
   3926    REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
   3927    Make any useful entries we can with that information.  Called from
   3928    above function and called recursively.  */
   3929 
   3930 static void
   3931 record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode, rtx op0,
   3932 		  rtx op1, int reversed_nonequality)
   3933 {
   3934   unsigned op0_hash, op1_hash;
   3935   int op0_in_memory, op1_in_memory;
   3936   struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
   3937 
   3938   /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
   3939      we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
   3940      true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
   3941      is not worth testing for with no SUBREG).  */
   3942 
   3943   /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE.  */
   3944   if (code == EQ && paradoxical_subreg_p (op0))
   3945     {
   3946       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
   3947       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
   3948       if (tem)
   3949 	record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
   3950 			  reversed_nonequality);
   3951     }
   3952 
   3953   if (code == EQ && paradoxical_subreg_p (op1))
   3954     {
   3955       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
   3956       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
   3957       if (tem)
   3958 	record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
   3959 			  reversed_nonequality);
   3960     }
   3961 
   3962   /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
   3963      making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE.  */
   3964 
   3965   /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
   3966      if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
   3967      alternating between two modes each wider than MODE.  */
   3968 
   3969   if (code == NE
   3970       && partial_subreg_p (op0)
   3971       && subreg_lowpart_p (op0))
   3972     {
   3973       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
   3974       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
   3975       if (tem)
   3976 	record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
   3977 			  reversed_nonequality);
   3978     }
   3979 
   3980   if (code == NE
   3981       && partial_subreg_p (op1)
   3982       && subreg_lowpart_p (op1))
   3983     {
   3984       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
   3985       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
   3986       if (tem)
   3987 	record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
   3988 			  reversed_nonequality);
   3989     }
   3990 
   3991   /* Hash both operands.  */
   3992 
   3993   do_not_record = 0;
   3994   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
   3995   op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
   3996   op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
   3997 
   3998   if (do_not_record)
   3999     return;
   4000 
   4001   do_not_record = 0;
   4002   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
   4003   op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
   4004   op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
   4005 
   4006   if (do_not_record)
   4007     return;
   4008 
   4009   /* Look up both operands.  */
   4010   op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash, mode);
   4011   op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
   4012 
   4013   /* If both operands are already equivalent or if they are not in the
   4014      table but are identical, do nothing.  */
   4015   if ((op0_elt != 0 && op1_elt != 0
   4016        && op0_elt->first_same_value == op1_elt->first_same_value)
   4017       || op0 == op1 || rtx_equal_p (op0, op1))
   4018     return;
   4019 
   4020   /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
   4021      comparison.   Similarly if this is floating-point.  In the latter
   4022      case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
   4023      If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
   4024      whose intent was to change -0 to +0.  */
   4025 
   4026   if (code != EQ || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)))
   4027     {
   4028       struct qty_table_elem *ent;
   4029       int qty;
   4030 
   4031       /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
   4032 	 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
   4033 	 do anything.  */
   4034 
   4035       if (!REG_P (op1))
   4036 	op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
   4037 
   4038       if ((reversed_nonequality && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
   4039 	  || !REG_P (op0) || op1 == 0)
   4040 	return;
   4041 
   4042       /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already.  This gives it a
   4043 	 new quantity number.  */
   4044       if (op0_elt == 0)
   4045 	{
   4046 	  if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
   4047 	    {
   4048 	      rehash_using_reg (op0);
   4049 	      op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
   4050 
   4051 	      /* If OP0 is contained in OP1, this changes its hash code
   4052 		 as well.  Faster to rehash than to check, except
   4053 		 for the simple case of a constant.  */
   4054 	      if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
   4055 		op1_hash = HASH (op1,mode);
   4056 	    }
   4057 
   4058 	  op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
   4059 	  op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
   4060 	}
   4061 
   4062       qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op0));
   4063       ent = &qty_table[qty];
   4064 
   4065       ent->comparison_code = code;
   4066       if (REG_P (op1))
   4067 	{
   4068 	  /* Look it up again--in case op0 and op1 are the same.  */
   4069 	  op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
   4070 
   4071 	  /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number.  */
   4072 	  if (op1_elt == 0)
   4073 	    {
   4074 	      if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
   4075 		{
   4076 		  rehash_using_reg (op1);
   4077 		  op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
   4078 		}
   4079 
   4080 	      op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
   4081 	      op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
   4082 	    }
   4083 
   4084 	  ent->comparison_const = NULL_RTX;
   4085 	  ent->comparison_qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op1));
   4086 	}
   4087       else
   4088 	{
   4089 	  ent->comparison_const = op1;
   4090 	  ent->comparison_qty = INT_MIN;
   4091 	}
   4092 
   4093       return;
   4094     }
   4095 
   4096   /* If either side is still missing an equivalence, make it now,
   4097      then merge the equivalences.  */
   4098 
   4099   if (op0_elt == 0)
   4100     {
   4101       if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
   4102 	{
   4103 	  rehash_using_reg (op0);
   4104 	  op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
   4105 	}
   4106 
   4107       op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
   4108       op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
   4109     }
   4110 
   4111   if (op1_elt == 0)
   4112     {
   4113       if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
   4114 	{
   4115 	  rehash_using_reg (op1);
   4116 	  op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
   4117 	}
   4118 
   4119       op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
   4120       op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
   4121     }
   4122 
   4123   merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
   4124 }
   4125 
   4126 /* CSE processing for one instruction.
   4128 
   4129    Most "true" common subexpressions are mostly optimized away in GIMPLE,
   4130    but the few that "leak through" are cleaned up by cse_insn, and complex
   4131    addressing modes are often formed here.
   4132 
   4133    The main function is cse_insn, and between here and that function
   4134    a couple of helper functions is defined to keep the size of cse_insn
   4135    within reasonable proportions.
   4136 
   4137    Data is shared between the main and helper functions via STRUCT SET,
   4138    that contains all data related for every set in the instruction that
   4139    is being processed.
   4140 
   4141    Note that cse_main processes all sets in the instruction.  Most
   4142    passes in GCC only process simple SET insns or single_set insns, but
   4143    CSE processes insns with multiple sets as well.  */
   4144 
   4145 /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction.  */
   4146 
   4147 struct set
   4148 {
   4149   /* The SET rtx itself.  */
   4150   rtx rtl;
   4151   /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing).  */
   4152   rtx src;
   4153   /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET.  */
   4154   struct table_elt *src_elt;
   4155   /* Hash value for the SET_SRC.  */
   4156   unsigned src_hash;
   4157   /* Hash value for the SET_DEST.  */
   4158   unsigned dest_hash;
   4159   /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped.  */
   4160   rtx inner_dest;
   4161   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory.  */
   4162   char src_in_memory;
   4163   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
   4164      whose value cannot be predicted and understood.  */
   4165   char src_volatile;
   4166   /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT.
   4167      The size of this field should match the size of the mode
   4168      field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h).  */
   4169   ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
   4170   /* Hash value of constant equivalent for SET_SRC.  */
   4171   unsigned src_const_hash;
   4172   /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
   4173   rtx src_const;
   4174   /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
   4175   struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
   4176   /* Table entry for the destination address.  */
   4177   struct table_elt *dest_addr_elt;
   4178 };
   4179 
   4180 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
   4182    "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.  After cse, REG1 will probably not
   4183    be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
   4184    (set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
   4185    that computed their value.  Then REG1 will become a dead store
   4186    and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
   4187 
   4188    Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
   4189    then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
   4190    into a three-operand insn.
   4191 
   4192    This is the last transformation that cse_insn will try to do.  */
   4193 
   4194 static void
   4195 try_back_substitute_reg (rtx set, rtx_insn *insn)
   4196 {
   4197   rtx dest = SET_DEST (set);
   4198   rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
   4199 
   4200   if (REG_P (dest)
   4201       && REG_P (src) && ! HARD_REGISTER_P (src)
   4202       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (src)))
   4203     {
   4204       int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
   4205       struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
   4206 
   4207       if (src_ent->first_reg == REGNO (dest))
   4208 	{
   4209 	  /* Scan for the previous nonnote insn, but stop at a basic
   4210 	     block boundary.  */
   4211 	  rtx_insn *prev = insn;
   4212 	  rtx_insn *bb_head = BB_HEAD (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn));
   4213 	  do
   4214 	    {
   4215 	      prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
   4216 	    }
   4217 	  while (prev != bb_head && (NOTE_P (prev) || DEBUG_INSN_P (prev)));
   4218 
   4219 	  /* Do not swap the registers around if the previous instruction
   4220 	     attaches a REG_EQUIV note to REG1.
   4221 
   4222 	     ??? It's not entirely clear whether we can transfer a REG_EQUIV
   4223 	     from the pseudo that originally shadowed an incoming argument
   4224 	     to another register.  Some uses of REG_EQUIV might rely on it
   4225 	     being attached to REG1 rather than REG2.
   4226 
   4227 	     This section previously turned the REG_EQUIV into a REG_EQUAL
   4228 	     note.  We cannot do that because REG_EQUIV may provide an
   4229 	     uninitialized stack slot when REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is used.  */
   4230 	  if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
   4231 	      && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
   4232 	      && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == src
   4233 	      && ! find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX))
   4234 	    {
   4235 	      rtx note;
   4236 
   4237 	      validate_change (prev, &SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
   4238 	      validate_change (insn, &SET_DEST (set), src, 1);
   4239 	      validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (set), dest, 1);
   4240 	      apply_change_group ();
   4241 
   4242 	      /* If INSN has a REG_EQUAL note, and this note mentions
   4243 		 REG0, then we must delete it, because the value in
   4244 		 REG0 has changed.  If the note's value is REG1, we must
   4245 		 also delete it because that is now this insn's dest.  */
   4246 	      note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
   4247 	      if (note != 0
   4248 		  && (reg_mentioned_p (dest, XEXP (note, 0))
   4249 		      || rtx_equal_p (src, XEXP (note, 0))))
   4250 		remove_note (insn, note);
   4251 
   4252 	      /* If INSN has a REG_ARGS_SIZE note, move it to PREV.  */
   4253 	      note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_ARGS_SIZE, NULL_RTX);
   4254 	      if (note != 0)
   4255 		{
   4256 		  remove_note (insn, note);
   4257 		  gcc_assert (!find_reg_note (prev, REG_ARGS_SIZE, NULL_RTX));
   4258 		  set_unique_reg_note (prev, REG_ARGS_SIZE, XEXP (note, 0));
   4259 		}
   4260 	    }
   4261 	}
   4262     }
   4263 }
   4264 
   4265 /* Add an entry containing RTL X into SETS.  */
   4266 static inline void
   4267 add_to_set (vec<struct set> *sets, rtx x)
   4268 {
   4269   struct set entry = {};
   4270   entry.rtl = x;
   4271   sets->safe_push (entry);
   4272 }
   4273 
   4274 /* Record all the SETs in this instruction into SETS_PTR,
   4275    and return the number of recorded sets.  */
   4276 static int
   4277 find_sets_in_insn (rtx_insn *insn, vec<struct set> *psets)
   4278 {
   4279   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
   4280 
   4281   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
   4282     {
   4283       /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
   4284 	 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
   4285 	 The reason is not efficiency but rather
   4286 	 so that we can test at the end for instructions
   4287 	 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
   4288 	 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
   4289 	 that were unconditional jumps to begin with.  */
   4290       if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
   4291 	  && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
   4292 	;
   4293       /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
   4294 	 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
   4295 	 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing.  */
   4296       else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
   4297 	;
   4298       else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CONST_VECTOR
   4299 	       && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) != MODE_VECTOR_BOOL
   4300 	       /* Prevent duplicates from being generated if the type is a V1
   4301 		  type and a subreg.  Folding this will result in the same
   4302 		  element as folding x itself.  */
   4303 	       && !(SUBREG_P (SET_DEST (x))
   4304 		    && known_eq (GET_MODE_NUNITS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))), 1)))
   4305 	{
   4306 	  /* First register the vector itself.  */
   4307 	  add_to_set (psets, x);
   4308 	  rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
   4309 	  /* Go over the constants of the CONST_VECTOR in forward order, to
   4310 	     put them in the same order in the SETS array.  */
   4311 	  for (unsigned i = 0; i < const_vector_encoded_nelts (src) ; i++)
   4312 	    {
   4313 	      /* These are templates and don't actually get emitted but are
   4314 		 used to tell CSE how to get to a particular constant.  */
   4315 	      rtx y = simplify_gen_vec_select (SET_DEST (x), i);
   4316 	      gcc_assert (y);
   4317 	      add_to_set (psets, gen_rtx_SET (y, CONST_VECTOR_ELT (src, i)));
   4318 	    }
   4319 	}
   4320       else
   4321 	add_to_set (psets, x);
   4322     }
   4323   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
   4324     {
   4325       int i, lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
   4326 
   4327       /* Go over the expressions of the PARALLEL in forward order, to
   4328 	 put them in the same order in the SETS array.  */
   4329       for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
   4330 	{
   4331 	  rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
   4332 	  if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
   4333 	    {
   4334 	      /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
   4335 		 ignore the result of apply_change_group.  */
   4336 	      if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
   4337 		  && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
   4338 		;
   4339 	      else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
   4340 		;
   4341 	      else
   4342 		add_to_set (psets, y);
   4343 	    }
   4344 	}
   4345     }
   4346 
   4347   return psets->length ();
   4348 }
   4349 
   4350 /* Subroutine of canonicalize_insn.  X is an ASM_OPERANDS in INSN.  */
   4352 
   4353 static void
   4354 canon_asm_operands (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
   4355 {
   4356   for (int i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   4357     {
   4358       rtx input = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i);
   4359       if (!(REG_P (input) && HARD_REGISTER_P (input)))
   4360 	{
   4361 	  input = canon_reg (input, insn);
   4362 	  validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), input, 1);
   4363 	}
   4364     }
   4365 }
   4366 
   4367 /* Where possible, substitute every register reference in the N_SETS
   4368    number of SETS in INSN with the canonical register.
   4369 
   4370    Register canonicalization propagatest the earliest register (i.e.
   4371    one that is set before INSN) with the same value.  This is a very
   4372    useful, simple form of CSE, to clean up warts from expanding GIMPLE
   4373    to RTL.  For instance, a CONST for an address is usually expanded
   4374    multiple times to loads into different registers, thus creating many
   4375    subexpressions of the form:
   4376 
   4377    (set (reg1) (some_const))
   4378    (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
   4379    (set (reg2) (some_const))
   4380    (set (mem (... reg2 ...) (thing)))
   4381 
   4382    After canonicalizing, the code takes the following form:
   4383 
   4384    (set (reg1) (some_const))
   4385    (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
   4386    (set (reg2) (some_const))
   4387    (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
   4388 
   4389    The set to reg2 is now trivially dead, and the memory reference (or
   4390    address, or whatever) may be a candidate for further CSEing.
   4391 
   4392    In this function, the result of apply_change_group can be ignored;
   4393    see canon_reg.  */
   4394 
   4395 static void
   4396 canonicalize_insn (rtx_insn *insn, vec<struct set> *psets)
   4397 {
   4398   vec<struct set> sets = *psets;
   4399   int n_sets = sets.length ();
   4400   rtx tem;
   4401   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
   4402   int i;
   4403 
   4404   if (CALL_P (insn))
   4405     {
   4406       for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
   4407 	if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) != SET)
   4408 	  XEXP (tem, 0) = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
   4409     }
   4410 
   4411   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
   4412     {
   4413       canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
   4414       apply_change_group ();
   4415       fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
   4416     }
   4417   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
   4418     {
   4419       /* If we clobber memory, canon the address.
   4420 	 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
   4421 	 because we have already invalidated the reg.  */
   4422       if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
   4423 	canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), insn);
   4424     }
   4425   else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
   4426 	   && ! (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
   4427 		 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
   4428     /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location.  */
   4429     canon_reg (x, insn);
   4430   else if (GET_CODE (x) == ASM_OPERANDS)
   4431     canon_asm_operands (x, insn);
   4432   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
   4433     {
   4434       canon_reg (x, insn);
   4435       apply_change_group ();
   4436       fold_rtx (x, insn);
   4437     }
   4438   else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
   4439     canon_reg (PATTERN (insn), insn);
   4440   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
   4441     {
   4442       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   4443 	{
   4444 	  rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
   4445 	  if (GET_CODE (y) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
   4446 	    {
   4447 	      canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
   4448 	      apply_change_group ();
   4449 	      fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
   4450 	    }
   4451 	  else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
   4452 	    {
   4453 	      if (MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
   4454 		canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), insn);
   4455 	    }
   4456 	  else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
   4457 		   && ! (REG_P (XEXP (y, 0))
   4458 			 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
   4459 	    canon_reg (y, insn);
   4460 	  else if (GET_CODE (y) == ASM_OPERANDS)
   4461 	    canon_asm_operands (y, insn);
   4462 	  else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
   4463 	    {
   4464 	      canon_reg (y, insn);
   4465 	      apply_change_group ();
   4466 	      fold_rtx (y, insn);
   4467 	    }
   4468 	}
   4469     }
   4470 
   4471   if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
   4472       && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0)
   4473     {
   4474       /* We potentially will process this insn many times.  Therefore,
   4475 	 drop the REG_EQUAL note if it is equal to the SET_SRC of the
   4476 	 unique set in INSN.
   4477 
   4478 	 Do not do so if the REG_EQUAL note is for a STRICT_LOW_PART,
   4479 	 because cse_insn handles those specially.  */
   4480       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) != STRICT_LOW_PART
   4481 	  && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
   4482 	remove_note (insn, tem);
   4483       else
   4484 	{
   4485 	  canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
   4486 	  apply_change_group ();
   4487 	  XEXP (tem, 0) = fold_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
   4488 	  df_notes_rescan (insn);
   4489 	}
   4490     }
   4491 
   4492   /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
   4493      We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
   4494      present in the insn pattern.  In that case, we want to ensure that
   4495      we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern.  So we will replace
   4496      both operands at the same time.  Otherwise, we would fail to find an
   4497      equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
   4498 
   4499      We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
   4500      but we don't do this any more.  */
   4501 
   4502   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   4503     {
   4504       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   4505       rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
   4506       rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (src, insn);
   4507 
   4508       validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
   4509 
   4510       if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   4511 	{
   4512 	  validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
   4513 			   canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
   4514 	  validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
   4515 			   canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
   4516 	}
   4517 
   4518       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
   4519 	     || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
   4520 	     || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   4521 	dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
   4522 
   4523       if (MEM_P (dest))
   4524 	canon_reg (dest, insn);
   4525     }
   4526 
   4527   /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
   4528      group and see if they all work.  Note that this will cause some
   4529      canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
   4530      because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
   4531      occur often.
   4532 
   4533      The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg.  */
   4534 
   4535   apply_change_group ();
   4536 }
   4537 
   4538 /* Main function of CSE.
   4540    First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
   4541    in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
   4542    Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
   4543    of available values.  */
   4544 
   4545 static void
   4546 cse_insn (rtx_insn *insn)
   4547 {
   4548   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
   4549   int i;
   4550   rtx tem;
   4551   int n_sets = 0;
   4552 
   4553   rtx src_eqv = 0;
   4554   struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
   4555   int src_eqv_volatile = 0;
   4556   int src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
   4557   unsigned src_eqv_hash = 0;
   4558 
   4559   this_insn = insn;
   4560 
   4561   /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
   4562      to ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
   4563      elsewhere in this insn.  */
   4564   invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (insn);
   4565 
   4566   /* Record all the SETs in this instruction.  */
   4567   auto_vec<struct set, 8> sets;
   4568   n_sets = find_sets_in_insn (insn, (vec<struct set>*)&sets);
   4569 
   4570   /* Substitute the canonical register where possible.  */
   4571   canonicalize_insn (insn, (vec<struct set>*)&sets);
   4572 
   4573   /* If this insn has a REG_EQUAL note, store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV,
   4574      if different, or if the DEST is a STRICT_LOW_PART/ZERO_EXTRACT.  The
   4575      latter condition is necessary because SRC_EQV is handled specially for
   4576      this case, and if it isn't set, then there will be no equivalence
   4577      for the destination.  */
   4578   if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
   4579       && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0)
   4580     {
   4581 
   4582       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
   4583 	  && (! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
   4584 	      || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART))
   4585 	src_eqv = copy_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0));
   4586       /* If DEST is of the form ZERO_EXTACT, as in:
   4587 	 (set (zero_extract:SI (reg:SI 119)
   4588 		  (const_int 16 [0x10])
   4589 		  (const_int 16 [0x10]))
   4590 	      (const_int 51154 [0xc7d2]))
   4591 	 REG_EQUAL note will specify the value of register (reg:SI 119) at this
   4592 	 point.  Note that this is different from SRC_EQV. We can however
   4593 	 calculate SRC_EQV with the position and width of ZERO_EXTRACT.  */
   4594       else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
   4595 	       && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (tem, 0))
   4596 	       && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 1))
   4597 	       && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 2)))
   4598 	{
   4599 	  rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 0);
   4600 	  /* This is the mode of XEXP (tem, 0) as well.  */
   4601 	  scalar_int_mode dest_mode
   4602 	    = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (dest_reg));
   4603 	  rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 1);
   4604 	  rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 2);
   4605 	  HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (XEXP (tem, 0));
   4606 	  HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
   4607 	  unsigned int shift;
   4608 	  if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
   4609 	    shift = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode)
   4610 		     - INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width));
   4611 	  else
   4612 	    shift = INTVAL (pos);
   4613 	  if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
   4614 	    mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1;
   4615 	  else
   4616 	    mask = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
   4617 	  val = (val >> shift) & mask;
   4618 	  src_eqv = GEN_INT (val);
   4619 	}
   4620     }
   4621 
   4622   /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
   4623      Detect assignments from or to volatile things
   4624      and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
   4625      in the rest of this function.
   4626 
   4627      Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains.  */
   4628 
   4629   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   4630     {
   4631       bool repeat = false;
   4632       bool noop_insn = false;
   4633       rtx src, dest;
   4634       rtx src_folded;
   4635       struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
   4636       machine_mode mode;
   4637       rtx src_eqv_here;
   4638       rtx src_const = 0;
   4639       rtx src_related = 0;
   4640       bool src_related_is_const_anchor = false;
   4641       struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
   4642       int src_cost = MAX_COST;
   4643       int src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
   4644       int src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
   4645       int src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
   4646       int src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
   4647       int src_regcost = MAX_COST;
   4648       int src_eqv_regcost = MAX_COST;
   4649       int src_folded_regcost = MAX_COST;
   4650       int src_related_regcost = MAX_COST;
   4651       int src_elt_regcost = MAX_COST;
   4652       scalar_int_mode int_mode;
   4653 
   4654       dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   4655       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
   4656 
   4657       /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
   4658 	 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
   4659 	 This way we can keep different modes separate.  */
   4660 
   4661       mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
   4662       sets[i].mode = mode;
   4663 
   4664       if (src_eqv)
   4665 	{
   4666 	  machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
   4667 	  if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   4668 	    eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
   4669 	  do_not_record = 0;
   4670 	  hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
   4671 	  src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
   4672 
   4673 	  /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression.  */
   4674 
   4675 	  if (!do_not_record)
   4676 	    src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
   4677 
   4678 	  src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
   4679 	  src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
   4680 	}
   4681 
   4682       /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
   4683 	 value of the INNER register, not the destination.  So it is not
   4684 	 a valid substitution for the source.  But save it for later.  */
   4685       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   4686 	src_eqv_here = 0;
   4687       else
   4688 	src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
   4689 
   4690       /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC.  Then get the fully-
   4691 	 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid.  */
   4692       src_folded = fold_rtx (src, NULL);
   4693 
   4694 #if 0
   4695       /* ??? This caused bad code to be generated for the m68k port with -O2.
   4696 	 Suppose src is (CONST_INT -1), and that after truncation src_folded
   4697 	 is (CONST_INT 3).  Suppose src_folded is then used for src_const.
   4698 	 At the end we will add src and src_const to the same equivalence
   4699 	 class.  We now have 3 and -1 on the same equivalence class.  This
   4700 	 causes later instructions to be mis-optimized.  */
   4701       /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
   4702 	 so we will be able to record it later.  */
   4703       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   4704 	{
   4705 	  rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
   4706 
   4707 	  if (CONST_INT_P (src)
   4708 	      && CONST_INT_P (width)
   4709 	      && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
   4710 	      && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
   4711 	    src_folded
   4712 	      = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1
   4713 					  << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
   4714 	}
   4715 #endif
   4716 
   4717       /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
   4718 	 should not be recorded at all.  In that case,
   4719 	 prevent any further processing of this assignment.
   4720 
   4721 	 We set DO_NOT_RECORD if the destination has a REG_UNUSED note.
   4722 	 This avoids getting the source register into the tables, where it
   4723 	 may be invalidated later (via REG_QTY), then trigger an ICE upon
   4724 	 re-insertion.
   4725 
   4726 	 This is only a problem in multi-set insns.  If it were a single
   4727 	 set the dead copy would have been removed.  If the RHS were anything
   4728 	 but a simple REG, then we won't call insert_regs and thus there's
   4729 	 no potential for triggering the ICE.  */
   4730       do_not_record = (REG_P (dest)
   4731 		       && REG_P (src)
   4732 		       && find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, dest));
   4733       hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
   4734 
   4735       sets[i].src = src;
   4736       sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
   4737       sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
   4738       sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
   4739 
   4740       /* If SRC is a MEM, there is a REG_EQUIV note for SRC, and DEST is
   4741 	 a pseudo, do not record SRC.  Using SRC as a replacement for
   4742 	 anything else will be incorrect in that situation.  Note that
   4743 	 this usually occurs only for stack slots, in which case all the
   4744 	 RTL would be referring to SRC, so we don't lose any optimization
   4745 	 opportunities by not having SRC in the hash table.  */
   4746 
   4747       if (MEM_P (src)
   4748 	  && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX) != 0
   4749 	  && REG_P (dest)
   4750 	  && REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   4751 	sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
   4752 
   4753       else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
   4754 	       && GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
   4755 	{
   4756 	  /* Do not record result of a non-volatile inline asm with
   4757 	     more than one result.  */
   4758 	  if (n_sets > 1)
   4759 	    sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
   4760 
   4761 	  int j, lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
   4762 	  for (j = 0; j < lim; j++)
   4763 	    {
   4764 	      rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, j);
   4765 	      /* And do not record result of a non-volatile inline asm
   4766 		 with "memory" clobber.  */
   4767 	      if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER && MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
   4768 		{
   4769 		  sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
   4770 		  break;
   4771 		}
   4772 	    }
   4773 	}
   4774 
   4775 #if 0
   4776       /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
   4777 	 appear to still be needed.  So let's try without it since this
   4778 	 code hurts cse'ing widened ops.  */
   4779       /* If source is a paradoxical subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
   4780 	 treat it as volatile.  It may do the work of an SI in one context
   4781 	 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
   4782 	 in general.  */
   4783       if (paradoxical_subreg_p (src))
   4784 	sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
   4785 #endif
   4786 
   4787       /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC.  Try to replace
   4788          SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
   4789 
   4790          We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
   4791          version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
   4792 	 to a constant.
   4793 
   4794          Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
   4795          of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
   4796          the same class; we check for this).
   4797 
   4798 	 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
   4799 
   4800          We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
   4801          REG_NOTE.  */
   4802 
   4803       if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
   4804 	elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
   4805 
   4806       sets[i].src_elt = elt;
   4807 
   4808       if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
   4809 	{
   4810 	  if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
   4811 	    {
   4812 	      /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
   4813 		 classes are now equivalent.  So merge them.  */
   4814 	      merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
   4815 	      src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
   4816 	      src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, elt->mode);
   4817 	    }
   4818 
   4819 	  src_eqv_here = 0;
   4820 	}
   4821 
   4822       else if (src_eqv_elt)
   4823 	elt = src_eqv_elt;
   4824 
   4825       /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
   4826 	 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'.  Look in
   4827 	 any known equivalences first.  (If the constant is not in the
   4828 	 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash').  */
   4829       if (elt)
   4830 	for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   4831 	  if (p->is_const)
   4832 	    {
   4833 	      src_const = p->exp;
   4834 	      src_const_elt = elt;
   4835 	      break;
   4836 	    }
   4837 
   4838       if (src_const == 0
   4839 	  && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
   4840 	      /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
   4841 		 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
   4842 		 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used.  */
   4843 	      || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
   4844 		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
   4845 		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
   4846 	src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
   4847       else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
   4848 	src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
   4849 
   4850       /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
   4851 	 hash code and look it up.  */
   4852       if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
   4853 	{
   4854 	  sets[i].src_const_hash = HASH (src_const, mode);
   4855 	  src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
   4856 	}
   4857 
   4858       sets[i].src_const = src_const;
   4859       sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
   4860 
   4861       /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
   4862 	 equivalent.  Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
   4863 	 isn't, set ELT to it.  */
   4864       if (src_const_elt && elt
   4865 	  && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
   4866 	merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
   4867       else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
   4868 	elt = src_const_elt;
   4869 
   4870       /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
   4871          equivalent of SRC.  */
   4872       if (src_const
   4873 	  && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
   4874 	      || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
   4875 	{
   4876 	  src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
   4877 	  if (src_related)
   4878 	    {
   4879 	      struct table_elt *src_related_elt
   4880 		= lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
   4881 	      if (src_related_elt && elt)
   4882 		{
   4883 		  if (elt->first_same_value
   4884 		      != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
   4885 		    /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
   4886 		       involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
   4887 		       twice.  Merge the involved classes.  */
   4888 		    merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
   4889 
   4890 		  src_related = 0;
   4891 		  src_related_elt = 0;
   4892 		}
   4893 	      else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
   4894 		elt = src_related_elt;
   4895 	    }
   4896 	}
   4897 
   4898       /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
   4899 	 wider mode.  */
   4900 
   4901       if (src_const && src_related == 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
   4902 	  && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
   4903 	  && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
   4904 	{
   4905 	  opt_scalar_int_mode wider_mode_iter;
   4906 	  FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode_iter, int_mode)
   4907 	    {
   4908 	      scalar_int_mode wider_mode = wider_mode_iter.require ();
   4909 	      if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
   4910 		break;
   4911 
   4912 	      struct table_elt *const_elt
   4913 		= lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
   4914 
   4915 	      if (const_elt == 0)
   4916 		continue;
   4917 
   4918 	      for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
   4919 		   const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
   4920 		if (REG_P (const_elt->exp))
   4921 		  {
   4922 		    src_related = gen_lowpart (int_mode, const_elt->exp);
   4923 		    break;
   4924 		  }
   4925 
   4926 	      if (src_related != 0)
   4927 		break;
   4928 	    }
   4929 	}
   4930 
   4931       /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
   4932 	 a mode narrower than a word.  If so, it might have been generated
   4933 	 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND.  If we already
   4934 	 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
   4935 	 value.  */
   4936 
   4937       if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
   4938 	  && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
   4939 	  && GET_CODE (src) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
   4940 	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
   4941 	{
   4942 	  opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter;
   4943 	  rtx new_and = gen_rtx_AND (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
   4944 
   4945 	  FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter, int_mode)
   4946 	    {
   4947 	      scalar_int_mode tmode = tmode_iter.require ();
   4948 	      if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
   4949 		break;
   4950 
   4951 	      rtx inner = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
   4952 	      struct table_elt *larger_elt;
   4953 
   4954 	      if (inner)
   4955 		{
   4956 		  PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
   4957 		  XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
   4958 		  larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
   4959 		  if (larger_elt == 0)
   4960 		    continue;
   4961 
   4962 		  for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
   4963 		       larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
   4964 		    if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
   4965 		      {
   4966 			src_related
   4967 			  = gen_lowpart (int_mode, larger_elt->exp);
   4968 			break;
   4969 		      }
   4970 
   4971 		  if (src_related)
   4972 		    break;
   4973 		}
   4974 	    }
   4975 	}
   4976 
   4977       /* See if a MEM has already been loaded with a widening operation;
   4978 	 if it has, we can use a subreg of that.  Many CISC machines
   4979 	 also have such operations, but this is only likely to be
   4980 	 beneficial on these machines.  */
   4981 
   4982       rtx_code extend_op;
   4983       if (flag_expensive_optimizations && src_related == 0
   4984 	  && MEM_P (src) && ! do_not_record
   4985 	  && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
   4986 	  && (extend_op = load_extend_op (int_mode)) != UNKNOWN)
   4987 	{
   4988 	  struct rtx_def memory_extend_buf;
   4989 	  rtx memory_extend_rtx = &memory_extend_buf;
   4990 
   4991 	  /* Set what we are trying to extend and the operation it might
   4992 	     have been extended with.  */
   4993 	  memset (memory_extend_rtx, 0, sizeof (*memory_extend_rtx));
   4994 	  PUT_CODE (memory_extend_rtx, extend_op);
   4995 	  XEXP (memory_extend_rtx, 0) = src;
   4996 
   4997 	  opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter;
   4998 	  FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter, int_mode)
   4999 	    {
   5000 	      struct table_elt *larger_elt;
   5001 
   5002 	      scalar_int_mode tmode = tmode_iter.require ();
   5003 	      if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
   5004 		break;
   5005 
   5006 	      PUT_MODE (memory_extend_rtx, tmode);
   5007 	      larger_elt = lookup (memory_extend_rtx,
   5008 				   HASH (memory_extend_rtx, tmode), tmode);
   5009 	      if (larger_elt == 0)
   5010 		continue;
   5011 
   5012 	      for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
   5013 		   larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
   5014 		if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
   5015 		  {
   5016 		    src_related = gen_lowpart (int_mode, larger_elt->exp);
   5017 		    break;
   5018 		  }
   5019 
   5020 	      if (src_related)
   5021 		break;
   5022 	    }
   5023 	}
   5024 
   5025       /* Try to express the constant using a register+offset expression
   5026 	 derived from a constant anchor.  */
   5027 
   5028       if (targetm.const_anchor
   5029 	  && !src_related
   5030 	  && src_const
   5031 	  && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT)
   5032 	{
   5033 	  src_related = try_const_anchors (src_const, mode);
   5034 	  src_related_is_const_anchor = src_related != NULL_RTX;
   5035 	}
   5036 
   5037       /* Try to re-materialize a vec_dup with an existing constant.   */
   5038       rtx src_elt;
   5039       if ((!src_eqv_here || CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
   5040 	  && const_vec_duplicate_p (src, &src_elt))
   5041 	{
   5042 	   machine_mode const_mode = GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (src));
   5043 	   struct table_elt *related_elt
   5044 		= lookup (src_elt, HASH (src_elt, const_mode), const_mode);
   5045 	   if (related_elt)
   5046 	    {
   5047 	      for (related_elt = related_elt->first_same_value;
   5048 		   related_elt; related_elt = related_elt->next_same_value)
   5049 		if (REG_P (related_elt->exp))
   5050 		  {
   5051 		   /* We don't need to compare costs with an existing (constant)
   5052 		      src_eqv_here, since any such src_eqv_here should already be
   5053 		      available in src_const.  */
   5054 		    src_eqv_here
   5055 			= gen_rtx_VEC_DUPLICATE (GET_MODE (src),
   5056 						 related_elt->exp);
   5057 		    break;
   5058 		  }
   5059 	    }
   5060 	}
   5061 
   5062       if (src == src_folded)
   5063 	src_folded = 0;
   5064 
   5065       /* At this point, ELT, if nonzero, points to a class of expressions
   5066          equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
   5067 	 and SRC_RELATED, if nonzero, each contain additional equivalent
   5068 	 expressions.  Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
   5069 	 already in the equivalence class.
   5070 
   5071 	 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination.  If found,
   5072 	 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
   5073 	 elimination of the insn.  Indicate this by placing it in
   5074 	 `src_related'.  */
   5075 
   5076       if (elt)
   5077 	elt = elt->first_same_value;
   5078       for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   5079 	{
   5080 	  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
   5081 
   5082 	  /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it.  Then we do not
   5083 	     have to check for validity below.  In most cases, we can use
   5084 	     `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done.  */
   5085 	  if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
   5086 	    continue;
   5087 
   5088 	  /* Also skip paradoxical subregs, unless that's what we're
   5089 	     looking for.  */
   5090 	  if (paradoxical_subreg_p (p->exp)
   5091 	      && ! (src != 0
   5092 		    && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
   5093 		    && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (p->exp)
   5094 		    && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
   5095 					 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (p->exp)))))
   5096 	    continue;
   5097 
   5098 	  if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
   5099 	    src = 0;
   5100 	  else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
   5101 		   && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
   5102 	    src_folded = 0;
   5103 	  else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
   5104 		   && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
   5105 	    src_eqv_here = 0;
   5106 	  else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
   5107 		   && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
   5108 	    src_related = 0;
   5109 
   5110 	  /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
   5111 	     to prefer it.  Copy it to src_related.  The code below will
   5112 	     then give it a negative cost.  */
   5113 	  if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
   5114 	    src_related = p->exp;
   5115 	}
   5116 
   5117       /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
   5118          possibilities.  Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
   5119          that are when they are equal cost.  Note that we can never
   5120          worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
   5121 	 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
   5122 	 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case.  */
   5123       if (src)
   5124 	{
   5125 	  if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
   5126 	    src_cost = src_regcost = -1;
   5127 	  else
   5128 	    {
   5129 	      src_cost = COST (src, mode);
   5130 	      src_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src);
   5131 	    }
   5132 	}
   5133 
   5134       if (src_eqv_here)
   5135 	{
   5136 	  if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
   5137 	    src_eqv_cost = src_eqv_regcost = -1;
   5138 	  else
   5139 	    {
   5140 	      src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here, mode);
   5141 	      src_eqv_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_eqv_here);
   5142 	    }
   5143 	}
   5144 
   5145       if (src_folded)
   5146 	{
   5147 	  if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
   5148 	    src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
   5149 	  else
   5150 	    {
   5151 	      src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded, mode);
   5152 	      src_folded_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_folded);
   5153 	    }
   5154 	}
   5155 
   5156       if (src_related)
   5157 	{
   5158 	  if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
   5159 	    src_related_cost = src_related_regcost = -1;
   5160 	  else
   5161 	    {
   5162 	      src_related_cost = COST (src_related, mode);
   5163 	      src_related_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_related);
   5164 
   5165 	      /* If a const-anchor is used to synthesize a constant that
   5166 		 normally requires multiple instructions then slightly prefer
   5167 		 it over the original sequence.  These instructions are likely
   5168 		 to become redundant now.  We can't compare against the cost
   5169 		 of src_eqv_here because, on MIPS for example, multi-insn
   5170 		 constants have zero cost; they are assumed to be hoisted from
   5171 		 loops.  */
   5172 	      if (src_related_is_const_anchor
   5173 		  && src_related_cost == src_cost
   5174 		  && src_eqv_here)
   5175 		src_related_cost--;
   5176 	    }
   5177 	}
   5178 
   5179       /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
   5180 	 cheaper even though it looks more expensive.  */
   5181       if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
   5182 	src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
   5183 
   5184       /* Terminate loop when replacement made.  This must terminate since
   5185          the current contents will be tested and will always be valid.  */
   5186       while (1)
   5187 	{
   5188 	  rtx trial;
   5189 
   5190 	  /* Skip invalid entries.  */
   5191 	  while (elt && !REG_P (elt->exp)
   5192 		 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
   5193 	    elt = elt->next_same_value;
   5194 
   5195 	  /* A paradoxical subreg would be bad here: it'll be the right
   5196 	     size, but later may be adjusted so that the upper bits aren't
   5197 	     what we want.  So reject it.  */
   5198 	  if (elt != 0
   5199 	      && paradoxical_subreg_p (elt->exp)
   5200 	      /* It is okay, though, if the rtx we're trying to match
   5201 		 will ignore any of the bits we can't predict.  */
   5202 	      && ! (src != 0
   5203 		    && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
   5204 		    && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (elt->exp)
   5205 		    && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
   5206 					 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)))))
   5207 	    {
   5208 	      elt = elt->next_same_value;
   5209 	      continue;
   5210 	    }
   5211 
   5212 	  if (elt)
   5213 	    {
   5214 	      src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
   5215 	      src_elt_regcost = elt->regcost;
   5216 	    }
   5217 
   5218 	  /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time.   For items
   5219 	     of equal cost, use this order:
   5220 	     src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry.  */
   5221 	  if (src_folded
   5222 	      && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
   5223 			     src_cost, src_regcost) <= 0
   5224 	      && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
   5225 			     src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
   5226 	      && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
   5227 			     src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
   5228 	      && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
   5229 			     src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
   5230 	    trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
   5231 	  else if (src
   5232 		   && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
   5233 				  src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
   5234 		   && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
   5235 				  src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
   5236 		   && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
   5237 				  src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
   5238 	    trial = src, src_cost = MAX_COST;
   5239 	  else if (src_eqv_here
   5240 		   && preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
   5241 				  src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
   5242 		   && preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
   5243 				  src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
   5244 	    trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
   5245 	  else if (src_related
   5246 		   && preferable (src_related_cost, src_related_regcost,
   5247 				  src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
   5248 	    trial = src_related, src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
   5249 	  else
   5250 	    {
   5251 	      trial = elt->exp;
   5252 	      elt = elt->next_same_value;
   5253 	      src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
   5254 	    }
   5255 
   5256 	  /* Try to optimize
   5257 	     (set (reg:M N) (const_int A))
   5258 	     (set (reg:M2 O) (const_int B))
   5259 	     (set (zero_extract:M2 (reg:M N) (const_int C) (const_int D))
   5260 		  (reg:M2 O)).  */
   5261 	  if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
   5262 	      && CONST_INT_P (trial)
   5263 	      && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
   5264 	      && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
   5265 	      && REG_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0))
   5266 	      && (known_ge
   5267 		  (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))),
   5268 		   INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))))
   5269 	      && ((unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
   5270 		  + (unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
   5271 		  <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))
   5272 	    {
   5273 	      rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0);
   5274 	      rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
   5275 	      rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2);
   5276 	      unsigned int dest_hash = HASH (dest_reg, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
   5277 	      struct table_elt *dest_elt
   5278 		= lookup (dest_reg, dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
   5279 	      rtx dest_cst = NULL;
   5280 
   5281 	      if (dest_elt)
   5282 		for (p = dest_elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
   5283 		  if (p->is_const && CONST_INT_P (p->exp))
   5284 		    {
   5285 		      dest_cst = p->exp;
   5286 		      break;
   5287 		    }
   5288 	      if (dest_cst)
   5289 		{
   5290 		  HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (dest_cst);
   5291 		  HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
   5292 		  unsigned int shift;
   5293 		  /* This is the mode of DEST_CST as well.  */
   5294 		  scalar_int_mode dest_mode
   5295 		    = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (dest_reg));
   5296 		  if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
   5297 		    shift = GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode)
   5298 			    - INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width);
   5299 		  else
   5300 		    shift = INTVAL (pos);
   5301 		  if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
   5302 		    mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1;
   5303 		  else
   5304 		    mask = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
   5305 		  val &= ~(mask << shift);
   5306 		  val |= (INTVAL (trial) & mask) << shift;
   5307 		  val = trunc_int_for_mode (val, dest_mode);
   5308 		  validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl),
   5309 					   dest_reg, 1);
   5310 		  validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
   5311 					   GEN_INT (val), 1);
   5312 		  if (apply_change_group ())
   5313 		    {
   5314 		      rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
   5315 		      if (note)
   5316 			{
   5317 			  remove_note (insn, note);
   5318 			  df_notes_rescan (insn);
   5319 			}
   5320 		      src_eqv = NULL_RTX;
   5321 		      src_eqv_elt = NULL;
   5322 		      src_eqv_volatile = 0;
   5323 		      src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
   5324 		      src_eqv_hash = 0;
   5325 		      repeat = true;
   5326 		      break;
   5327 		    }
   5328 		}
   5329 	    }
   5330 
   5331 	  /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
   5332 	     check for this separately here.  We will delete such an
   5333 	     insn below.
   5334 
   5335 	     For other cases such as a table jump or conditional jump
   5336 	     where we know the ultimate target, go ahead and replace the
   5337 	     operand.  While that may not make a valid insn, we will
   5338 	     reemit the jump below (and also insert any necessary
   5339 	     barriers).  */
   5340 	  if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
   5341 	      && (trial == pc_rtx
   5342 		  || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
   5343 		      && ! condjump_p (insn))))
   5344 	    {
   5345 	      /* Don't substitute non-local labels, this confuses CFG.  */
   5346 	      if (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
   5347 		  && LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (trial))
   5348 		continue;
   5349 
   5350 	      SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
   5351 	      cse_jumps_altered = true;
   5352 	      break;
   5353 	    }
   5354 
   5355 	  /* Similarly, lots of targets don't allow no-op
   5356 	     (set (mem x) (mem x)) moves.  Even (set (reg x) (reg x))
   5357 	     might be impossible for certain registers (like CC registers).  */
   5358 	  else if (n_sets == 1
   5359 		   && !CALL_P (insn)
   5360 		   && (MEM_P (trial) || REG_P (trial))
   5361 		   && rtx_equal_p (trial, dest)
   5362 		   && !side_effects_p (dest)
   5363 		   && (cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions
   5364 		       || insn_nothrow_p (insn))
   5365 		   /* We can only remove the later store if the earlier aliases
   5366 		      at least all accesses the later one.  */
   5367 		   && (!MEM_P (trial)
   5368 		       || ((MEM_ALIAS_SET (dest) == MEM_ALIAS_SET (trial)
   5369 			    || alias_set_subset_of (MEM_ALIAS_SET (dest),
   5370 						    MEM_ALIAS_SET (trial)))
   5371 			    && (!MEM_EXPR (trial)
   5372 				|| refs_same_for_tbaa_p (MEM_EXPR (trial),
   5373 							 MEM_EXPR (dest))))))
   5374 	    {
   5375 	      SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
   5376 	      noop_insn = true;
   5377 	      break;
   5378 	    }
   5379 
   5380 	  /* Reject certain invalid forms of CONST that we create.  */
   5381 	  else if (CONSTANT_P (trial)
   5382 		   && GET_CODE (trial) == CONST
   5383 		   /* Reject cases that will cause decode_rtx_const to
   5384 		      die.  On the alpha when simplifying a switch, we
   5385 		      get (const (truncate (minus (label_ref)
   5386 		      (label_ref)))).  */
   5387 		   && (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == TRUNCATE
   5388 		       /* Likewise on IA-64, except without the
   5389 			  truncate.  */
   5390 		       || (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == MINUS
   5391 			   && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
   5392 			   && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
   5393 	    /* Do nothing for this case.  */
   5394 	    ;
   5395 
   5396 	  /* Do not replace anything with a MEM, except the replacement
   5397 	     is a no-op.  This allows this loop to terminate.  */
   5398 	  else if (MEM_P (trial) && !rtx_equal_p (trial, SET_SRC(sets[i].rtl)))
   5399 	    /* Do nothing for this case.  */
   5400 	    ;
   5401 
   5402 	  /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn.  */
   5403 	  else if (validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
   5404 					    trial, 0))
   5405 	    {
   5406 	      rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
   5407 
   5408 	      /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
   5409 		 canon_reg.  */
   5410 
   5411 	      validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
   5412 	      apply_change_group ();
   5413 
   5414 	      break;
   5415 	    }
   5416 
   5417 	  /* If the current function uses a constant pool and this is a
   5418 	     constant, try making a pool entry. Put it in src_folded
   5419 	     unless we already have done this since that is where it
   5420 	     likely came from.  */
   5421 
   5422 	  else if (crtl->uses_const_pool
   5423 		   && CONSTANT_P (trial)
   5424 		   && !CONST_INT_P (trial)
   5425 		   && (src_folded == 0 || !MEM_P (src_folded))
   5426 		   && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC
   5427 		   && mode != VOIDmode)
   5428 	    {
   5429 	      src_folded = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
   5430 	      if (src_folded)
   5431 		{
   5432 		  src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded, mode);
   5433 		  src_folded_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_folded);
   5434 		}
   5435 	    }
   5436 	}
   5437 
   5438       /* If we changed the insn too much, handle this set from scratch.  */
   5439       if (repeat)
   5440 	{
   5441 	  i--;
   5442 	  continue;
   5443 	}
   5444 
   5445       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
   5446 
   5447       /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
   5448 	 However, there is an important exception:  If both are registers
   5449 	 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
   5450 	 with the head of the class.  If we do not do this, we will have
   5451 	 both registers live over a portion of the basic block.  This way,
   5452 	 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping.  */
   5453       if (REG_P (dest)
   5454 	  && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest)))
   5455 	{
   5456 	  int dest_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (dest));
   5457 	  struct qty_table_elem *dest_ent = &qty_table[dest_q];
   5458 
   5459 	  if (dest_ent->mode == GET_MODE (dest)
   5460 	      && dest_ent->first_reg != REGNO (dest)
   5461 	      && REG_P (src) && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
   5462 	      /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
   5463 		 SET_SRC or SET_DEST.  */
   5464 	      && (!REG_P (sets[i].src)
   5465 		  || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   5466 	      && (!REG_P (dest) || REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
   5467 	    /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
   5468 	       SRC is a hard register.  */
   5469 	    {
   5470 	      int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
   5471 	      struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
   5472 	      int first = src_ent->first_reg;
   5473 	      rtx new_src
   5474 		= (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
   5475 		   ? regno_reg_rtx[first] : gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (src), first));
   5476 
   5477 	      /* We must use validate-change even for this, because this
   5478 		 might be a special no-op instruction, suitable only to
   5479 		 tag notes onto.  */
   5480 	      if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_src, 0))
   5481 		{
   5482 		  src = new_src;
   5483 		  /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
   5484 		     setting SRC to, use that constant.  We ignored it when we
   5485 		     thought we could make this into a no-op.  */
   5486 		  if (src_const && COST (src_const, mode) < COST (src, mode)
   5487 		      && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
   5488 					  src_const, 0))
   5489 		    src = src_const;
   5490 		}
   5491 	    }
   5492 	}
   5493 
   5494       /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values.  */
   5495       if (src != sets[i].src)
   5496 	{
   5497 	  do_not_record = 0;
   5498 	  hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
   5499 	  sets[i].src = src;
   5500 	  sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
   5501 	  sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
   5502 	  sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
   5503 	  sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
   5504 	}
   5505 
   5506       /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
   5507 	 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_EQUAL note if the constant
   5508 	 is different from the source.  We don't want to do it for a constant
   5509 	 pseudo since verifying that this pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a
   5510 	 pain; moreover such a note won't help anything.
   5511 
   5512 	 Avoid a REG_EQUAL note for (CONST (MINUS (LABEL_REF) (LABEL_REF)))
   5513 	 which can be created for a reference to a compile time computable
   5514 	 entry in a jump table.  */
   5515       if (n_sets == 1
   5516 	  && REG_P (dest)
   5517 	  && src_const
   5518 	  && !REG_P (src_const)
   5519 	  && !(GET_CODE (src_const) == SUBREG
   5520 	       && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (src_const)))
   5521 	  && !(GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
   5522 	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_const, 0)) == MINUS
   5523 	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
   5524 	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
   5525 	  && !rtx_equal_p (src, src_const))
   5526 	{
   5527 	  /* Make sure that the rtx is not shared.  */
   5528 	  src_const = copy_rtx (src_const);
   5529 
   5530 	  /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note,
   5531 	     making a new one if one does not already exist.  */
   5532 	  set_unique_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, src_const);
   5533 	  df_notes_rescan (insn);
   5534 	}
   5535 
   5536       /* Now deal with the destination.  */
   5537       do_not_record = 0;
   5538 
   5539       /* Look within any ZERO_EXTRACT to the MEM or REG within it.  */
   5540       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
   5541 	     || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
   5542 	     || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   5543 	dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
   5544 
   5545       sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
   5546 
   5547       if (MEM_P (dest))
   5548 	{
   5549 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
   5550 	  /* Stack pushes invalidate the stack pointer.  */
   5551 	  rtx addr = XEXP (dest, 0);
   5552 	  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr)) == RTX_AUTOINC
   5553 	      && XEXP (addr, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
   5554 	    invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx, VOIDmode);
   5555 #endif
   5556 	  dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
   5557 	}
   5558 
   5559       /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
   5560 	 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
   5561 	 since the register values used in the address computation
   5562 	 are those before this instruction.  */
   5563       sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, mode);
   5564 
   5565       /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
   5566 	 because the value in it after the store
   5567 	 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation.  */
   5568 
   5569       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   5570 	{
   5571 	  rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
   5572 
   5573 	  if (src_const != 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
   5574 	      && CONST_INT_P (width)
   5575 	      && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
   5576 	      && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
   5577 		    & (HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U << INTVAL (width))))
   5578 	    /* Exception: if the value is constant,
   5579 	       and it won't be truncated, record it.  */
   5580 	    ;
   5581 	  else
   5582 	    {
   5583 	      /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
   5584 		 but no new value will be recorded.
   5585 		 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
   5586 		 values can be recorded for bitfields.  */
   5587 	      sets[i].src_elt = 0;
   5588 	      sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
   5589 	      src_eqv = 0;
   5590 	      src_eqv_elt = 0;
   5591 	    }
   5592 	}
   5593 
   5594       /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
   5595 	 the insn.  */
   5596       else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
   5597 	{
   5598 	  /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to.  */
   5599 	  cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
   5600 	  cse_jumps_altered = true;
   5601 	  /* No more processing for this set.  */
   5602 	  sets[i].rtl = 0;
   5603 	}
   5604 
   5605       /* Similarly for no-op moves.  */
   5606       else if (noop_insn)
   5607 	{
   5608 	  if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions && can_throw_internal (insn))
   5609 	    cse_cfg_altered = true;
   5610 	  cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
   5611 	  /* No more processing for this set.  */
   5612 	  sets[i].rtl = 0;
   5613 	}
   5614 
   5615       /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
   5616 	 be a conditional or computed branch.  */
   5617       else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF
   5618 	       && !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (src))
   5619 	{
   5620 	  /* We reemit the jump in as many cases as possible just in
   5621 	     case the form of an unconditional jump is significantly
   5622 	     different than a computed jump or conditional jump.
   5623 
   5624 	     If this insn has multiple sets, then reemitting the
   5625 	     jump is nontrivial.  So instead we just force rerecognition
   5626 	     and hope for the best.  */
   5627 	  if (n_sets == 1)
   5628 	    {
   5629 	      rtx_jump_insn *new_rtx;
   5630 	      rtx note;
   5631 
   5632 	      rtx_insn *seq = targetm.gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0));
   5633 	      new_rtx = emit_jump_insn_before (seq, insn);
   5634 	      JUMP_LABEL (new_rtx) = XEXP (src, 0);
   5635 	      LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
   5636 
   5637 	      /* Make sure to copy over REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO.  */
   5638 	      note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, 0);
   5639 	      if (note)
   5640 		{
   5641 		  XEXP (note, 1) = NULL_RTX;
   5642 		  REG_NOTES (new_rtx) = note;
   5643 		}
   5644 
   5645 	      cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
   5646 	      insn = new_rtx;
   5647 	    }
   5648 	  else
   5649 	    INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
   5650 
   5651 	  /* Do not bother deleting any unreachable code, let jump do it.  */
   5652 	  cse_jumps_altered = true;
   5653 	  sets[i].rtl = 0;
   5654 	}
   5655 
   5656       /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
   5657 	 processing for this assignment.  */
   5658 
   5659       else if (do_not_record)
   5660 	{
   5661 	  invalidate_dest (dest);
   5662 	  sets[i].rtl = 0;
   5663 	}
   5664 
   5665       if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
   5666 	{
   5667 	  do_not_record = 0;
   5668 	  sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
   5669 	  if (do_not_record)
   5670 	    {
   5671 	      invalidate_dest (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
   5672 	      sets[i].rtl = 0;
   5673 	    }
   5674 	}
   5675     }
   5676 
   5677   /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
   5678      if they are not already present.
   5679      Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
   5680      This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
   5681      the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
   5682      (having been invalidated).  */
   5683 
   5684   if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
   5685       && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
   5686     {
   5687       struct table_elt *elt;
   5688       struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
   5689       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
   5690       machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
   5691 
   5692       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   5693 	{
   5694 	  eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
   5695 	  classp = 0;
   5696 	}
   5697       if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
   5698 	{
   5699 	  rehash_using_reg (src_eqv);
   5700 	  src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
   5701 	}
   5702       elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
   5703       elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
   5704       src_eqv_elt = elt;
   5705 
   5706       /* Check to see if src_eqv_elt is the same as a set source which
   5707 	 does not yet have an elt, and if so set the elt of the set source
   5708 	 to src_eqv_elt.  */
   5709       for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5710 	if (sets[i].rtl && sets[i].src_elt == 0
   5711 	    && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_eqv))
   5712 	  sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
   5713     }
   5714 
   5715   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5716     if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
   5717 	&& ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
   5718       {
   5719 	if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   5720 	  {
   5721 	    /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
   5722 	       gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
   5723 	       not just for the subreg being stored in now.
   5724 	       This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
   5725 	       to treat the entire reg as the destination.  */
   5726 	    sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
   5727 	    sets[i].src_hash = src_eqv_hash;
   5728 	  }
   5729 	else
   5730 	  {
   5731 	    /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
   5732 	       already present.  */
   5733 	    struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
   5734 	    rtx src = sets[i].src;
   5735 	    rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   5736 	    machine_mode mode
   5737 	      = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
   5738 
   5739 	    /* It's possible that we have a source value known to be
   5740 	       constant but don't have a REG_EQUAL note on the insn.
   5741 	       Lack of a note will mean src_eqv_elt will be NULL.  This
   5742 	       can happen where we've generated a SUBREG to access a
   5743 	       CONST_INT that is already in a register in a wider mode.
   5744 	       Ensure that the source expression is put in the proper
   5745 	       constant class.  */
   5746 	    if (!classp)
   5747 	      classp = sets[i].src_const_elt;
   5748 
   5749 	    if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
   5750 	      {
   5751 		struct table_elt *elt;
   5752 
   5753 		/* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
   5754 		   any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
   5755 		   match if not still valid.  */
   5756 		if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
   5757 		  {
   5758 		    rehash_using_reg (src);
   5759 		    sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
   5760 		  }
   5761 		elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
   5762 		elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
   5763 		/* If inline asm has any clobbers, ensure we only reuse
   5764 		   existing inline asms and never try to put the ASM_OPERANDS
   5765 		   into an insn that isn't inline asm.  */
   5766 		if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
   5767 		    && GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
   5768 		  elt->cost = MAX_COST;
   5769 		sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
   5770 	      }
   5771 	    if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
   5772 		&& src != sets[i].src_const
   5773 		&& ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
   5774 	      sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
   5775 					sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
   5776 	  }
   5777       }
   5778     else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
   5779       /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
   5780 	 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
   5781 	 so that the destination goes into that class.  */
   5782       sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
   5783 
   5784   /* Record destination addresses in the hash table.  This allows us to
   5785      check if they are invalidated by other sets.  */
   5786   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5787     {
   5788       if (sets[i].rtl)
   5789 	{
   5790 	  rtx x = sets[i].inner_dest;
   5791 	  struct table_elt *elt;
   5792 	  machine_mode mode;
   5793 	  unsigned hash;
   5794 
   5795 	  if (MEM_P (x))
   5796 	    {
   5797 	      x = XEXP (x, 0);
   5798 	      mode = GET_MODE (x);
   5799 	      hash = HASH (x, mode);
   5800 	      elt = lookup (x, hash, mode);
   5801 	      if (!elt)
   5802 		{
   5803 		  if (insert_regs (x, NULL, 0))
   5804 		    {
   5805 		      rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   5806 
   5807 		      rehash_using_reg (x);
   5808 		      hash = HASH (x, mode);
   5809 		      sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
   5810 		    }
   5811 		  elt = insert (x, NULL, hash, mode);
   5812 		}
   5813 
   5814 	      sets[i].dest_addr_elt = elt;
   5815 	    }
   5816 	  else
   5817 	    sets[i].dest_addr_elt = NULL;
   5818 	}
   5819     }
   5820 
   5821   invalidate_from_clobbers (insn);
   5822 
   5823   /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls.  Memory is
   5824      invalidated by non-constant calls.  */
   5825 
   5826   if (CALL_P (insn))
   5827     {
   5828       if (!(RTL_CONST_OR_PURE_CALL_P (insn)))
   5829 	invalidate_memory ();
   5830       else
   5831 	/* For const/pure calls, invalidate any argument slots, because
   5832 	   those are owned by the callee.  */
   5833 	for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
   5834 	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == USE
   5835 	      && MEM_P (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)))
   5836 	    invalidate (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0), VOIDmode);
   5837       invalidate_for_call (insn);
   5838     }
   5839 
   5840   /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
   5841      If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
   5842      sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
   5843      a part of which is being set.  */
   5844 
   5845   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5846     if (sets[i].rtl)
   5847       {
   5848 	/* We can't use the inner dest, because the mode associated with
   5849 	   a ZERO_EXTRACT is significant.  */
   5850 	rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   5851 
   5852 	/* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
   5853 	   previous quantity's chain.
   5854 	   Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
   5855 	   we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those.  */
   5856 	if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
   5857 	  invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
   5858 	else if (MEM_P (dest))
   5859 	  invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
   5860 	else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
   5861 		 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   5862 	  invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
   5863       }
   5864 
   5865   /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg VAX)
   5866      the regs restored by the longjmp come from a later time
   5867      than the setjmp.  */
   5868   if (CALL_P (insn) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_SETJMP, NULL))
   5869     {
   5870       flush_hash_table ();
   5871       goto done;
   5872     }
   5873 
   5874   /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
   5875      are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
   5876      This removes from the hash table
   5877      any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
   5878 
   5879      We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
   5880      we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally.  */
   5881 
   5882   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5883     {
   5884       if (sets[i].rtl)
   5885 	{
   5886 	  rtx x = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   5887 
   5888 	  if (!REG_P (x))
   5889 	    mention_regs (x);
   5890 	  else
   5891 	    {
   5892 	      /* We used to rely on all references to a register becoming
   5893 		 inaccessible when a register changes to a new quantity,
   5894 		 since that changes the hash code.  However, that is not
   5895 		 safe, since after HASH_SIZE new quantities we get a
   5896 		 hash 'collision' of a register with its own invalid
   5897 		 entries.  And since SUBREGs have been changed not to
   5898 		 change their hash code with the hash code of the register,
   5899 		 it wouldn't work any longer at all.  So we have to check
   5900 		 for any invalid references lying around now.
   5901 		 This code is similar to the REG case in mention_regs,
   5902 		 but it knows that reg_tick has been incremented, and
   5903 		 it leaves reg_in_table as -1 .  */
   5904 	      unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
   5905 	      unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
   5906 	      unsigned int i;
   5907 
   5908 	      for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
   5909 		{
   5910 		  if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0)
   5911 		    {
   5912 		      remove_invalid_refs (i);
   5913 		      REG_IN_TABLE (i) = -1;
   5914 		    }
   5915 		}
   5916 	    }
   5917 	}
   5918     }
   5919 
   5920   /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
   5921      So replace each one with the current head of the same class.
   5922      Also check if destination addresses have been removed.  */
   5923 
   5924   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5925     if (sets[i].rtl)
   5926       {
   5927 	if (sets[i].dest_addr_elt
   5928 	    && sets[i].dest_addr_elt->first_same_value == 0)
   5929 	  {
   5930 	    /* The elt was removed, which means this destination is not
   5931 	       valid after this instruction.  */
   5932 	    sets[i].rtl = NULL_RTX;
   5933 	  }
   5934 	else if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
   5935 	  /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
   5936 	     or 0 if nothing remains of that class.  */
   5937 	  {
   5938 	    struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
   5939 
   5940 	    while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
   5941 	      elt = elt->prev_same_value;
   5942 
   5943 	    while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
   5944 	      elt = elt->next_same_value;
   5945 	    sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
   5946 	  }
   5947       }
   5948 
   5949   /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes.  */
   5950 
   5951   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
   5952     if (sets[i].rtl)
   5953       {
   5954 	rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
   5955 	struct table_elt *elt;
   5956 
   5957 	/* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
   5958 	   floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
   5959 	   memory.  */
   5960 	if ((flag_float_store
   5961 	     && MEM_P (dest)
   5962 	     && FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest)))
   5963 	    /* Don't record BLKmode values, because we don't know the
   5964 	       size of it, and can't be sure that other BLKmode values
   5965 	       have the same or smaller size.  */
   5966 	    || GET_MODE (dest) == BLKmode
   5967 	    /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
   5968 	       table, there is no point is recording DEST.  */
   5969 	    || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
   5970 	  continue;
   5971 
   5972 	/* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
   5973 	   and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
   5974 	   Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT.  */
   5975 	if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
   5976 	  dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
   5977 
   5978 	if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
   5979 	  /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities.  */
   5980 	  if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
   5981 	    {
   5982 	      /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
   5983 		 recalculated.  */
   5984 	      rehash_using_reg (dest);
   5985 	      sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
   5986 	    }
   5987 
   5988 	/* If DEST is a paradoxical SUBREG, don't record DEST since the bits
   5989 	   outside the mode of GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)) are undefined.  */
   5990 	if (paradoxical_subreg_p (dest))
   5991 	  continue;
   5992 
   5993 	elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
   5994 		      sets[i].dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest));
   5995 
   5996 	/* If this is a constant, insert the constant anchors with the
   5997 	   equivalent register-offset expressions using register DEST.  */
   5998 	if (targetm.const_anchor
   5999 	    && REG_P (dest)
   6000 	    && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest))
   6001 	    && GET_CODE (sets[i].src_elt->exp) == CONST_INT)
   6002 	  insert_const_anchors (dest, sets[i].src_elt->exp, GET_MODE (dest));
   6003 
   6004 	elt->in_memory = (MEM_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
   6005 			  && !MEM_READONLY_P (sets[i].inner_dest));
   6006 
   6007 	/* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
   6008 	   narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
   6009 	   we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
   6010 	   make that equivalence as well.
   6011 
   6012 	   However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart
   6013 	   will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart applied to
   6014 	   BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
   6015 	   BAR's equivalences.  If we don't get a simplified form, make
   6016 	   the SUBREG.  It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
   6017 	   cause two similar assignments to be detected.
   6018 
   6019 	   Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
   6020 	   already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table.  */
   6021 
   6022 	if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
   6023 	    && (known_equal_after_align_down
   6024 		(GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) - 1,
   6025 		 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) - 1,
   6026 		 UNITS_PER_WORD))
   6027 	    && !partial_subreg_p (dest)
   6028 	    && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
   6029 	  {
   6030 	    machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
   6031 	    struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
   6032 
   6033 	    for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
   6034 		 elt = elt->next_same_value)
   6035 	      {
   6036 		rtx new_src = 0;
   6037 		unsigned src_hash;
   6038 		struct table_elt *src_elt;
   6039 
   6040 		/* Ignore invalid entries.  */
   6041 		if (!REG_P (elt->exp)
   6042 		    && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
   6043 		  continue;
   6044 
   6045 		/* We may have already been playing subreg games.  If the
   6046 		   mode is already correct for the destination, use it.  */
   6047 		if (GET_MODE (elt->exp) == new_mode)
   6048 		  new_src = elt->exp;
   6049 		else
   6050 		  {
   6051 		    poly_uint64 byte
   6052 		      = subreg_lowpart_offset (new_mode, GET_MODE (dest));
   6053 		    new_src = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, elt->exp,
   6054 					           GET_MODE (dest), byte);
   6055 		  }
   6056 
   6057 		/* The call to simplify_gen_subreg fails if the value
   6058 		   is VOIDmode, yet we can't do any simplification, e.g.
   6059 		   for EXPR_LISTs denoting function call results.
   6060 		   It is invalid to construct a SUBREG with a VOIDmode
   6061 		   SUBREG_REG, hence a zero new_src means we can't do
   6062 		   this substitution.  */
   6063 		if (! new_src)
   6064 		  continue;
   6065 
   6066 		src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
   6067 		src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
   6068 
   6069 		/* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
   6070 		   already.  */
   6071 		if (src_elt == 0)
   6072 		  {
   6073 		    if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
   6074 		      {
   6075 			rehash_using_reg (new_src);
   6076 			src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
   6077 		      }
   6078 		    src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
   6079 		    src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
   6080 		    if (GET_CODE (new_src) == ASM_OPERANDS
   6081 			&& elt->cost == MAX_COST)
   6082 		      src_elt->cost = MAX_COST;
   6083 		  }
   6084 		else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
   6085 		  /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
   6086 		     actually the same.  */
   6087 		  merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
   6088 
   6089 		classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
   6090 		/* Ignore invalid entries.  */
   6091 		while (classp
   6092 		       && !REG_P (classp->exp)
   6093 		       && ! exp_equiv_p (classp->exp, classp->exp, 1, false))
   6094 		  classp = classp->next_same_value;
   6095 	      }
   6096 	  }
   6097       }
   6098 
   6099   /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
   6100      "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.  After cse, REG1 will probably not
   6101      be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
   6102      (set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
   6103      that computed their value.  Then REG1 will become a dead store
   6104      and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
   6105 
   6106      Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
   6107      then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
   6108      into a three-operand insn.
   6109 
   6110      Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN.  */
   6111 
   6112   if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl)
   6113     try_back_substitute_reg (sets[0].rtl, insn);
   6114 
   6115 done:;
   6116 }
   6117 
   6118 /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory.  */
   6120 
   6121 static void
   6122 invalidate_memory (void)
   6123 {
   6124   int i;
   6125   struct table_elt *p, *next;
   6126 
   6127   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
   6128     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
   6129       {
   6130 	next = p->next_same_hash;
   6131 	if (p->in_memory)
   6132 	  remove_from_table (p, i);
   6133       }
   6134 }
   6135 
   6136 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about INSN,
   6137    except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
   6138    This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
   6139    alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.  */
   6140 
   6141 static void
   6142 invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx_insn *insn)
   6143 {
   6144   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
   6145 
   6146   if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
   6147     {
   6148       rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
   6149       if (ref)
   6150 	{
   6151 	  if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
   6152 	      || MEM_P (ref))
   6153 	    invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
   6154 	  else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
   6155 		   || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   6156 	    invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
   6157 	}
   6158     }
   6159   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
   6160     {
   6161       int i;
   6162       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   6163 	{
   6164 	  rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
   6165 	  if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
   6166 	    {
   6167 	      rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
   6168 	      if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
   6169 		  || MEM_P (ref))
   6170 		invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
   6171 	      else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
   6172 		       || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   6173 		invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
   6174 	    }
   6175 	}
   6176     }
   6177 }
   6178 
   6179 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about INSN.
   6181    This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
   6182    alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.  */
   6183 
   6184 static void
   6185 invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (rtx_insn *insn)
   6186 {
   6187   rtx tem;
   6188   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
   6189 
   6190   if (CALL_P (insn))
   6191     {
   6192       for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
   6193 	{
   6194 	  rtx temx = XEXP (tem, 0);
   6195 	  if (GET_CODE (temx) == CLOBBER)
   6196 	    invalidate (SET_DEST (temx), VOIDmode);
   6197 	}
   6198     }
   6199 
   6200   /* Ensure we invalidate the destination register of a CALL insn.
   6201      This is necessary for machines where this register is a fixed_reg,
   6202      because no other code would invalidate it.  */
   6203   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
   6204     invalidate (SET_DEST (x), VOIDmode);
   6205 
   6206   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
   6207     {
   6208       int i;
   6209 
   6210       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   6211 	{
   6212 	  rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
   6213 	  if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
   6214 	    {
   6215 	      rtx clobbered = XEXP (y, 0);
   6216 
   6217 	      if (REG_P (clobbered)
   6218 		  || GET_CODE (clobbered) == SUBREG)
   6219 		invalidate (clobbered, VOIDmode);
   6220 	      else if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == STRICT_LOW_PART
   6221 		       || GET_CODE (clobbered) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
   6222 		invalidate (XEXP (clobbered, 0), GET_MODE (clobbered));
   6223 	    }
   6224 	  else if (GET_CODE (y) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
   6225 	    invalidate (SET_DEST (y), VOIDmode);
   6226 	}
   6227     }
   6228 }
   6229 
   6230 static rtx cse_process_note (rtx);
   6232 
   6233 /* A simplify_replace_fn_rtx callback for cse_process_note.  Process X,
   6234    part of the REG_NOTES of an insn.  Replace any registers with either
   6235    an equivalent constant or the canonical form of the register.
   6236    Only replace addresses if the containing MEM remains valid.
   6237 
   6238    Return the replacement for X, or null if it should be simplified
   6239    recursively.  */
   6240 
   6241 static rtx
   6242 cse_process_note_1 (rtx x, const_rtx, void *)
   6243 {
   6244   if (MEM_P (x))
   6245     {
   6246       validate_change (x, &XEXP (x, 0), cse_process_note (XEXP (x, 0)), false);
   6247       return x;
   6248     }
   6249 
   6250   if (REG_P (x))
   6251     {
   6252       int i = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
   6253 
   6254       /* Return a constant or a constant register.  */
   6255       if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
   6256 	{
   6257 	  struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[i];
   6258 
   6259 	  if (ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX
   6260 	      && (CONSTANT_P (ent->const_rtx)
   6261 		  || REG_P (ent->const_rtx)))
   6262 	    {
   6263 	      rtx new_rtx = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), ent->const_rtx);
   6264 	      if (new_rtx)
   6265 		return copy_rtx (new_rtx);
   6266 	    }
   6267 	}
   6268 
   6269       /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register.  */
   6270       return canon_reg (x, NULL);
   6271     }
   6272 
   6273   return NULL_RTX;
   6274 }
   6275 
   6276 /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn.  Replace any registers in it
   6277    with either an equivalent constant or the canonical form of the register.
   6278    Only replace addresses if the containing MEM remains valid.  */
   6279 
   6280 static rtx
   6281 cse_process_note (rtx x)
   6282 {
   6283   return simplify_replace_fn_rtx (x, NULL_RTX, cse_process_note_1, NULL);
   6284 }
   6285 
   6286 
   6287 /* Find a path in the CFG, starting with FIRST_BB to perform CSE on.
   6289 
   6290    DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, that is used to
   6291    describe the path.
   6292    It is filled with a queue of basic blocks, starting with FIRST_BB
   6293    and following a trace through the CFG.
   6294 
   6295    If all paths starting at FIRST_BB have been followed, or no new path
   6296    starting at FIRST_BB can be constructed, this function returns FALSE.
   6297    Otherwise, DATA->path is filled and the function returns TRUE indicating
   6298    that a path to follow was found.
   6299 
   6300    If FOLLOW_JUMPS is false, the maximum path length is 1 and the only
   6301    block in the path will be FIRST_BB.  */
   6302 
   6303 static bool
   6304 cse_find_path (basic_block first_bb, struct cse_basic_block_data *data,
   6305 	       int follow_jumps)
   6306 {
   6307   basic_block bb;
   6308   edge e;
   6309   int path_size;
   6310 
   6311   bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, first_bb->index);
   6312 
   6313   /* See if there is a previous path.  */
   6314   path_size = data->path_size;
   6315 
   6316   /* There is a previous path.  Make sure it started with FIRST_BB.  */
   6317   if (path_size)
   6318     gcc_assert (data->path[0].bb == first_bb);
   6319 
   6320   /* There was only one basic block in the last path.  Clear the path and
   6321      return, so that paths starting at another basic block can be tried.  */
   6322   if (path_size == 1)
   6323     {
   6324       path_size = 0;
   6325       goto done;
   6326     }
   6327 
   6328   /* If the path was empty from the beginning, construct a new path.  */
   6329   if (path_size == 0)
   6330     data->path[path_size++].bb = first_bb;
   6331   else
   6332     {
   6333       /* Otherwise, path_size must be equal to or greater than 2, because
   6334 	 a previous path exists that is at least two basic blocks long.
   6335 
   6336 	 Update the previous branch path, if any.  If the last branch was
   6337 	 previously along the branch edge, take the fallthrough edge now.  */
   6338       while (path_size >= 2)
   6339 	{
   6340 	  basic_block last_bb_in_path, previous_bb_in_path;
   6341 	  edge e;
   6342 
   6343 	  --path_size;
   6344 	  last_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size].bb;
   6345 	  previous_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
   6346 
   6347 	  /* If we previously followed a path along the branch edge, try
   6348 	     the fallthru edge now.  */
   6349 	  if (EDGE_COUNT (previous_bb_in_path->succs) == 2
   6350 	      && any_condjump_p (BB_END (previous_bb_in_path))
   6351 	      && (e = find_edge (previous_bb_in_path, last_bb_in_path))
   6352 	      && e == BRANCH_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path))
   6353 	    {
   6354 	      bb = FALLTHRU_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path)->dest;
   6355 	      if (bb != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
   6356 		  && single_pred_p (bb)
   6357 		  /* We used to assert here that we would only see blocks
   6358 		     that we have not visited yet.  But we may end up
   6359 		     visiting basic blocks twice if the CFG has changed
   6360 		     in this run of cse_main, because when the CFG changes
   6361 		     the topological sort of the CFG also changes.  A basic
   6362 		     blocks that previously had more than two predecessors
   6363 		     may now have a single predecessor, and become part of
   6364 		     a path that starts at another basic block.
   6365 
   6366 		     We still want to visit each basic block only once, so
   6367 		     halt the path here if we have already visited BB.  */
   6368 		  && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index))
   6369 		{
   6370 		  bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index);
   6371 		  data->path[path_size++].bb = bb;
   6372 		  break;
   6373 		}
   6374 	    }
   6375 
   6376 	  data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
   6377 	}
   6378 
   6379       /* If only one block remains in the path, bail.  */
   6380       if (path_size == 1)
   6381 	{
   6382 	  path_size = 0;
   6383 	  goto done;
   6384 	}
   6385     }
   6386 
   6387   /* Extend the path if possible.  */
   6388   if (follow_jumps)
   6389     {
   6390       bb = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
   6391       while (bb && path_size < param_max_cse_path_length)
   6392 	{
   6393 	  if (single_succ_p (bb))
   6394 	    e = single_succ_edge (bb);
   6395 	  else if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
   6396 		   && any_condjump_p (BB_END (bb)))
   6397 	    {
   6398 	      /* First try to follow the branch.  If that doesn't lead
   6399 		 to a useful path, follow the fallthru edge.  */
   6400 	      e = BRANCH_EDGE (bb);
   6401 	      if (!single_pred_p (e->dest))
   6402 		e = FALLTHRU_EDGE (bb);
   6403 	    }
   6404 	  else
   6405 	    e = NULL;
   6406 
   6407 	  if (e
   6408 	      && !((e->flags & EDGE_ABNORMAL_CALL) && cfun->has_nonlocal_label)
   6409 	      && e->dest != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
   6410 	      && single_pred_p (e->dest)
   6411 	      /* Avoid visiting basic blocks twice.  The large comment
   6412 		 above explains why this can happen.  */
   6413 	      && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, e->dest->index))
   6414 	    {
   6415 	      basic_block bb2 = e->dest;
   6416 	      bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb2->index);
   6417 	      data->path[path_size++].bb = bb2;
   6418 	      bb = bb2;
   6419 	    }
   6420 	  else
   6421 	    bb = NULL;
   6422 	}
   6423     }
   6424 
   6425 done:
   6426   data->path_size = path_size;
   6427   return path_size != 0;
   6428 }
   6429 
   6430 /* Dump the path in DATA to file F.  NSETS is the number of sets
   6432    in the path.  */
   6433 
   6434 static void
   6435 cse_dump_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data, int nsets, FILE *f)
   6436 {
   6437   int path_entry;
   6438 
   6439   fprintf (f, ";; Following path with %d sets: ", nsets);
   6440   for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < data->path_size; path_entry++)
   6441     fprintf (f, "%d ", (data->path[path_entry].bb)->index);
   6442   fputc ('\n', f);
   6443   fflush (f);
   6444 }
   6445 
   6446 
   6447 /* Return true if BB has exception handling successor edges.  */
   6449 
   6450 static bool
   6451 have_eh_succ_edges (basic_block bb)
   6452 {
   6453   edge e;
   6454   edge_iterator ei;
   6455 
   6456   FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
   6457     if (e->flags & EDGE_EH)
   6458       return true;
   6459 
   6460   return false;
   6461 }
   6462 
   6463 
   6464 /* Scan to the end of the path described by DATA.  Return an estimate of
   6466    the total number of SETs of all insns in the path.  */
   6467 
   6468 static void
   6469 cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data)
   6470 {
   6471   int nsets = 0;
   6472   int path_size = data->path_size;
   6473   int path_entry;
   6474 
   6475   /* Scan to end of each basic block in the path.  */
   6476   for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
   6477     {
   6478       basic_block bb;
   6479       rtx_insn *insn;
   6480 
   6481       bb = data->path[path_entry].bb;
   6482 
   6483       FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
   6484 	{
   6485 	  if (!INSN_P (insn))
   6486 	    continue;
   6487 
   6488 	  /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
   6489 	     especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS.  */
   6490 	  if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
   6491 	    nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0);
   6492 	  else
   6493 	    nsets += 1;
   6494 	}
   6495     }
   6496 
   6497   data->nsets = nsets;
   6498 }
   6499 
   6500 /* Return true if the pattern of INSN uses a LABEL_REF for which
   6502    there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND note.  */
   6503 
   6504 static bool
   6505 check_for_label_ref (rtx_insn *insn)
   6506 {
   6507   /* If this insn uses a LABEL_REF and there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND
   6508      note for it, we must rerun jump since it needs to place the note.  If
   6509      this is a LABEL_REF for a CODE_LABEL that isn't in the insn chain,
   6510      don't do this since no REG_LABEL_OPERAND will be added.  */
   6511   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
   6512   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, PATTERN (insn), ALL)
   6513     {
   6514       const_rtx x = *iter;
   6515       if (GET_CODE (x) == LABEL_REF
   6516 	  && !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (x)
   6517 	  && (!JUMP_P (insn)
   6518 	      || !label_is_jump_target_p (label_ref_label (x), insn))
   6519 	  && LABEL_P (label_ref_label (x))
   6520 	  && INSN_UID (label_ref_label (x)) != 0
   6521 	  && !find_reg_note (insn, REG_LABEL_OPERAND, label_ref_label (x)))
   6522 	return true;
   6523     }
   6524   return false;
   6525 }
   6526 
   6527 /* Process a single extended basic block described by EBB_DATA.  */
   6528 
   6529 static void
   6530 cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *ebb_data)
   6531 {
   6532   int path_size = ebb_data->path_size;
   6533   int path_entry;
   6534   int num_insns = 0;
   6535 
   6536   /* Allocate the space needed by qty_table.  */
   6537   qty_table = XNEWVEC (struct qty_table_elem, max_qty);
   6538 
   6539   new_basic_block ();
   6540   cse_ebb_live_in = df_get_live_in (ebb_data->path[0].bb);
   6541   cse_ebb_live_out = df_get_live_out (ebb_data->path[path_size - 1].bb);
   6542   for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
   6543     {
   6544       basic_block bb;
   6545       rtx_insn *insn;
   6546 
   6547       bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry].bb;
   6548 
   6549       /* Invalidate recorded information for eh regs if there is an EH
   6550 	 edge pointing to that bb.  */
   6551       if (bb_has_eh_pred (bb))
   6552 	{
   6553 	  df_ref def;
   6554 
   6555 	  FOR_EACH_ARTIFICIAL_DEF (def, bb->index)
   6556 	    if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_AT_TOP)
   6557 	      invalidate (DF_REF_REG (def), GET_MODE (DF_REF_REG (def)));
   6558 	}
   6559 
   6560       optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (bb);
   6561       FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
   6562 	{
   6563 	  /* If we have processed 1,000 insns, flush the hash table to
   6564 	     avoid extreme quadratic behavior.  We must not include NOTEs
   6565 	     in the count since there may be more of them when generating
   6566 	     debugging information.  If we clear the table at different
   6567 	     times, code generated with -g -O might be different than code
   6568 	     generated with -O but not -g.
   6569 
   6570 	     FIXME: This is a real kludge and needs to be done some other
   6571 		    way.  */
   6572 	  if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn)
   6573 	      && num_insns++ > param_max_cse_insns)
   6574 	    {
   6575 	      flush_hash_table ();
   6576 	      num_insns = 0;
   6577 	    }
   6578 
   6579 	  if (INSN_P (insn))
   6580 	    {
   6581 	      /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms
   6582 		 when looking for duplicate operations.  */
   6583 	      bool changed = false;
   6584 	      for (rtx note = REG_NOTES (insn); note; note = XEXP (note, 1))
   6585 		if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_EQUAL)
   6586 		  {
   6587 		    rtx newval = cse_process_note (XEXP (note, 0));
   6588 		    if (newval != XEXP (note, 0))
   6589 		      {
   6590 			XEXP (note, 0) = newval;
   6591 			changed = true;
   6592 		      }
   6593 		  }
   6594 	      if (changed)
   6595 		df_notes_rescan (insn);
   6596 
   6597 	      cse_insn (insn);
   6598 
   6599 	      /* If we haven't already found an insn where we added a LABEL_REF,
   6600 		 check this one.  */
   6601 	      if (INSN_P (insn) && !recorded_label_ref
   6602 		  && check_for_label_ref (insn))
   6603 		recorded_label_ref = true;
   6604 	    }
   6605 	}
   6606 
   6607       /* With non-call exceptions, we are not always able to update
   6608 	 the CFG properly inside cse_insn.  So clean up possibly
   6609 	 redundant EH edges here.  */
   6610       if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions && have_eh_succ_edges (bb))
   6611 	cse_cfg_altered |= purge_dead_edges (bb);
   6612 
   6613       /* If we changed a conditional jump, we may have terminated
   6614 	 the path we are following.  Check that by verifying that
   6615 	 the edge we would take still exists.  If the edge does
   6616 	 not exist anymore, purge the remainder of the path.
   6617 	 Note that this will cause us to return to the caller.  */
   6618       if (path_entry < path_size - 1)
   6619 	{
   6620 	  basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
   6621 	  if (!find_edge (bb, next_bb))
   6622 	    {
   6623 	      do
   6624 		{
   6625 		  path_size--;
   6626 
   6627 		  /* If we truncate the path, we must also reset the
   6628 		     visited bit on the remaining blocks in the path,
   6629 		     or we will never visit them at all.  */
   6630 		  bitmap_clear_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks,
   6631 			     ebb_data->path[path_size].bb->index);
   6632 		  ebb_data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
   6633 		}
   6634 	      while (path_size - 1 != path_entry);
   6635 	      ebb_data->path_size = path_size;
   6636 	    }
   6637 	}
   6638 
   6639       /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known
   6640 	 equivalences due to the condition being tested.  */
   6641       insn = BB_END (bb);
   6642       if (path_entry < path_size - 1
   6643 	  && EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
   6644 	  && JUMP_P (insn)
   6645 	  && single_set (insn)
   6646 	  && any_condjump_p (insn))
   6647 	{
   6648 	  basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
   6649 	  bool taken = (next_bb == BRANCH_EDGE (bb)->dest);
   6650 	  record_jump_equiv (insn, taken);
   6651 	}
   6652     }
   6653 
   6654   gcc_assert (next_qty <= max_qty);
   6655 
   6656   free (qty_table);
   6657 }
   6658 
   6659 
   6660 /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
   6662    F is the first instruction.
   6663    NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
   6664 
   6665    Return 2 if jump optimizations should be redone due to simplifications
   6666    in conditional jump instructions.
   6667    Return 1 if the CFG should be cleaned up because it has been modified.
   6668    Return 0 otherwise.  */
   6669 
   6670 static int
   6671 cse_main (rtx_insn *f ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int nregs)
   6672 {
   6673   struct cse_basic_block_data ebb_data;
   6674   basic_block bb;
   6675   int *rc_order = XNEWVEC (int, last_basic_block_for_fn (cfun));
   6676   int i, n_blocks;
   6677 
   6678   /* CSE doesn't use dominane info but can invalidate it in different ways.
   6679      For simplicity free dominance info here.  */
   6680   free_dominance_info (CDI_DOMINATORS);
   6681 
   6682   df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE);
   6683   df_note_add_problem ();
   6684   df_analyze ();
   6685   df_set_flags (DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
   6686 
   6687   reg_scan (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
   6688   init_cse_reg_info (nregs);
   6689 
   6690   ebb_data.path = XNEWVEC (struct branch_path,
   6691 			   param_max_cse_path_length);
   6692 
   6693   cse_cfg_altered = false;
   6694   cse_jumps_altered = false;
   6695   recorded_label_ref = false;
   6696   ebb_data.path_size = 0;
   6697   ebb_data.nsets = 0;
   6698   rtl_hooks = cse_rtl_hooks;
   6699 
   6700   init_recog ();
   6701   init_alias_analysis ();
   6702 
   6703   reg_eqv_table = XNEWVEC (struct reg_eqv_elem, nregs);
   6704 
   6705   /* Set up the table of already visited basic blocks.  */
   6706   cse_visited_basic_blocks = sbitmap_alloc (last_basic_block_for_fn (cfun));
   6707   bitmap_clear (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
   6708 
   6709   /* Loop over basic blocks in reverse completion order (RPO),
   6710      excluding the ENTRY and EXIT blocks.  */
   6711   n_blocks = pre_and_rev_post_order_compute (NULL, rc_order, false);
   6712   i = 0;
   6713   while (i < n_blocks)
   6714     {
   6715       /* Find the first block in the RPO queue that we have not yet
   6716 	 processed before.  */
   6717       do
   6718 	{
   6719 	  bb = BASIC_BLOCK_FOR_FN (cfun, rc_order[i++]);
   6720 	}
   6721       while (bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index)
   6722 	     && i < n_blocks);
   6723 
   6724       /* Find all paths starting with BB, and process them.  */
   6725       while (cse_find_path (bb, &ebb_data, flag_cse_follow_jumps))
   6726 	{
   6727 	  /* Pre-scan the path.  */
   6728 	  cse_prescan_path (&ebb_data);
   6729 
   6730 	  /* If this basic block has no sets, skip it.  */
   6731 	  if (ebb_data.nsets == 0)
   6732 	    continue;
   6733 
   6734 	  /* Get a reasonable estimate for the maximum number of qty's
   6735 	     needed for this path.  For this, we take the number of sets
   6736 	     and multiply that by MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS.  */
   6737 	  max_qty = ebb_data.nsets * MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS;
   6738 
   6739 	  /* Dump the path we're about to process.  */
   6740 	  if (dump_file)
   6741 	    cse_dump_path (&ebb_data, ebb_data.nsets, dump_file);
   6742 
   6743 	  cse_extended_basic_block (&ebb_data);
   6744 	}
   6745     }
   6746 
   6747   /* Clean up.  */
   6748   end_alias_analysis ();
   6749   free (reg_eqv_table);
   6750   free (ebb_data.path);
   6751   sbitmap_free (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
   6752   free (rc_order);
   6753   rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
   6754 
   6755   if (cse_jumps_altered || recorded_label_ref)
   6756     return 2;
   6757   else if (cse_cfg_altered)
   6758     return 1;
   6759   else
   6760     return 0;
   6761 }
   6762 
   6763 /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
   6765    COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
   6766    we count each register usage.
   6767 
   6768    Don't count a usage of DEST, which is the SET_DEST of a SET which
   6769    contains X in its SET_SRC.  This is because such a SET does not
   6770    modify the liveness of DEST.
   6771    DEST is set to pc_rtx for a trapping insn, or for an insn with side effects.
   6772    We must then count uses of a SET_DEST regardless, because the insn can't be
   6773    deleted here.  */
   6774 
   6775 static void
   6776 count_reg_usage (rtx x, int *counts, rtx dest, int incr)
   6777 {
   6778   enum rtx_code code;
   6779   rtx note;
   6780   const char *fmt;
   6781   int i, j;
   6782 
   6783   if (x == 0)
   6784     return;
   6785 
   6786   switch (code = GET_CODE (x))
   6787     {
   6788     case REG:
   6789       if (x != dest)
   6790 	counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
   6791       return;
   6792 
   6793     case PC:
   6794     case CONST:
   6795     CASE_CONST_ANY:
   6796     case SYMBOL_REF:
   6797     case LABEL_REF:
   6798       return;
   6799 
   6800     case CLOBBER:
   6801       /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any registers inside the address
   6802          as being used.  */
   6803       if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
   6804 	count_reg_usage (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
   6805       return;
   6806 
   6807     case SET:
   6808       /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST.  */
   6809       if (!REG_P (SET_DEST (x)))
   6810 	count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
   6811       count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts,
   6812 		       dest ? dest : SET_DEST (x),
   6813 		       incr);
   6814       return;
   6815 
   6816     case DEBUG_INSN:
   6817       return;
   6818 
   6819     case CALL_INSN:
   6820     case INSN:
   6821     case JUMP_INSN:
   6822       /* We expect dest to be NULL_RTX here.  If the insn may throw,
   6823 	 or if it cannot be deleted due to side-effects, mark this fact
   6824 	 by setting DEST to pc_rtx.  */
   6825       if ((!cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions && !insn_nothrow_p (x))
   6826 	  || side_effects_p (PATTERN (x)))
   6827 	dest = pc_rtx;
   6828       if (code == CALL_INSN)
   6829 	count_reg_usage (CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (x), counts, dest, incr);
   6830       count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, dest, incr);
   6831 
   6832       /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
   6833 	 use them.  */
   6834 
   6835       note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (x);
   6836       if (note)
   6837 	{
   6838 	  rtx eqv = XEXP (note, 0);
   6839 
   6840 	  if (GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST)
   6841 	  /* This REG_EQUAL note describes the result of a function call.
   6842 	     Process all the arguments.  */
   6843 	    do
   6844 	      {
   6845 		count_reg_usage (XEXP (eqv, 0), counts, dest, incr);
   6846 		eqv = XEXP (eqv, 1);
   6847 	      }
   6848 	    while (eqv && GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST);
   6849 	  else
   6850 	    count_reg_usage (eqv, counts, dest, incr);
   6851 	}
   6852       return;
   6853 
   6854     case EXPR_LIST:
   6855       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL
   6856 	  || (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) != REG_NONNEG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == USE)
   6857 	  /* FUNCTION_USAGE expression lists may include (CLOBBER (mem /u)),
   6858 	     involving registers in the address.  */
   6859 	  || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
   6860 	count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
   6861 
   6862       count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
   6863       return;
   6864 
   6865     case ASM_OPERANDS:
   6866       /* Iterate over just the inputs, not the constraints as well.  */
   6867       for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   6868 	count_reg_usage (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
   6869       return;
   6870 
   6871     case INSN_LIST:
   6872     case INT_LIST:
   6873       gcc_unreachable ();
   6874 
   6875     default:
   6876       break;
   6877     }
   6878 
   6879   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
   6880   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   6881     {
   6882       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
   6883 	count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
   6884       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
   6885 	for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
   6886 	  count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, dest, incr);
   6887     }
   6888 }
   6889 
   6890 /* Return true if X is a dead register.  */
   6892 
   6893 static inline int
   6894 is_dead_reg (const_rtx x, int *counts)
   6895 {
   6896   return (REG_P (x)
   6897 	  && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
   6898 	  && counts[REGNO (x)] == 0);
   6899 }
   6900 
   6901 /* Return true if set is live.  */
   6902 static bool
   6903 set_live_p (rtx set, int *counts)
   6904 {
   6905   if (set_noop_p (set))
   6906     return false;
   6907 
   6908   if (!is_dead_reg (SET_DEST (set), counts)
   6909       || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set)))
   6910     return true;
   6911 
   6912   return false;
   6913 }
   6914 
   6915 /* Return true if insn is live.  */
   6916 
   6917 static bool
   6918 insn_live_p (rtx_insn *insn, int *counts)
   6919 {
   6920   int i;
   6921   if (!cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions && !insn_nothrow_p (insn))
   6922     return true;
   6923   else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
   6924     return set_live_p (PATTERN (insn), counts);
   6925   else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
   6926     {
   6927       for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
   6928 	{
   6929 	  rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
   6930 
   6931 	  if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
   6932 	    {
   6933 	      if (set_live_p (elt, counts))
   6934 		return true;
   6935 	    }
   6936 	  else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
   6937 	    return true;
   6938 	}
   6939       return false;
   6940     }
   6941   else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
   6942     {
   6943       rtx_insn *next;
   6944 
   6945       if (DEBUG_MARKER_INSN_P (insn))
   6946 	return true;
   6947 
   6948       for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn); next; next = NEXT_INSN (next))
   6949 	if (NOTE_P (next))
   6950 	  continue;
   6951 	else if (!DEBUG_INSN_P (next))
   6952 	  return true;
   6953 	/* If we find an inspection point, such as a debug begin stmt,
   6954 	   we want to keep the earlier debug insn.  */
   6955 	else if (DEBUG_MARKER_INSN_P (next))
   6956 	  return true;
   6957 	else if (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (insn) == INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (next))
   6958 	  return false;
   6959 
   6960       return true;
   6961     }
   6962   else
   6963     return true;
   6964 }
   6965 
   6966 /* Count the number of stores into pseudo.  Callback for note_stores.  */
   6967 
   6968 static void
   6969 count_stores (rtx x, const_rtx set ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
   6970 {
   6971   int *counts = (int *) data;
   6972   if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   6973     counts[REGNO (x)]++;
   6974 }
   6975 
   6976 /* Return if DEBUG_INSN pattern PAT needs to be reset because some dead
   6977    pseudo doesn't have a replacement.  COUNTS[X] is zero if register X
   6978    is dead and REPLACEMENTS[X] is null if it has no replacemenet.
   6979    Set *SEEN_REPL to true if we see a dead register that does have
   6980    a replacement.  */
   6981 
   6982 static bool
   6983 is_dead_debug_insn (const_rtx pat, int *counts, rtx *replacements,
   6984 		    bool *seen_repl)
   6985 {
   6986   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
   6987   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, pat, NONCONST)
   6988     {
   6989       const_rtx x = *iter;
   6990       if (is_dead_reg (x, counts))
   6991 	{
   6992 	  if (replacements && replacements[REGNO (x)] != NULL_RTX)
   6993 	    *seen_repl = true;
   6994 	  else
   6995 	    return true;
   6996 	}
   6997     }
   6998   return false;
   6999 }
   7000 
   7001 /* Replace a dead pseudo in a DEBUG_INSN with replacement DEBUG_EXPR.
   7002    Callback for simplify_replace_fn_rtx.  */
   7003 
   7004 static rtx
   7005 replace_dead_reg (rtx x, const_rtx old_rtx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
   7006 {
   7007   rtx *replacements = (rtx *) data;
   7008 
   7009   if (REG_P (x)
   7010       && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
   7011       && replacements[REGNO (x)] != NULL_RTX)
   7012     {
   7013       if (GET_MODE (x) == GET_MODE (replacements[REGNO (x)]))
   7014 	return replacements[REGNO (x)];
   7015       return lowpart_subreg (GET_MODE (x), replacements[REGNO (x)],
   7016 			     GET_MODE (replacements[REGNO (x)]));
   7017     }
   7018   return NULL_RTX;
   7019 }
   7020 
   7021 /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
   7022    that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
   7023 
   7024    This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse, loop or other
   7025    optimizations.  It improves the heuristics in loop since it won't try to
   7026    move dead invariants out of loops or make givs for dead quantities.  The
   7027    remaining passes of the compilation are also sped up.  */
   7028 
   7029 int
   7030 delete_trivially_dead_insns (rtx_insn *insns, int nreg)
   7031 {
   7032   int *counts;
   7033   rtx_insn *insn, *prev;
   7034   rtx *replacements = NULL;
   7035   int ndead = 0;
   7036 
   7037   timevar_push (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
   7038   /* First count the number of times each register is used.  */
   7039   if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS)
   7040     {
   7041       counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg * 3);
   7042       for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
   7043 	if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
   7044 	  count_reg_usage (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), counts + nreg,
   7045 			   NULL_RTX, 1);
   7046 	else if (INSN_P (insn))
   7047 	  {
   7048 	    count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
   7049 	    note_stores (insn, count_stores, counts + nreg * 2);
   7050 	  }
   7051       /* If there can be debug insns, COUNTS are 3 consecutive arrays.
   7052 	 First one counts how many times each pseudo is used outside
   7053 	 of debug insns, second counts how many times each pseudo is
   7054 	 used in debug insns and third counts how many times a pseudo
   7055 	 is stored.  */
   7056     }
   7057   else
   7058     {
   7059       counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg);
   7060       for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
   7061 	if (INSN_P (insn))
   7062 	  count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
   7063       /* If no debug insns can be present, COUNTS is just an array
   7064 	 which counts how many times each pseudo is used.  */
   7065     }
   7066   /* Pseudo PIC register should be considered as used due to possible
   7067      new usages generated.  */
   7068   if (!reload_completed
   7069       && pic_offset_table_rtx
   7070       && REGNO (pic_offset_table_rtx) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
   7071     counts[REGNO (pic_offset_table_rtx)]++;
   7072   /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
   7073      registers or copy a register to itself.  As we delete an insn, remove
   7074      usage counts for registers it uses.
   7075 
   7076      The first jump optimization pass may leave a real insn as the last
   7077      insn in the function.   We must not skip that insn or we may end
   7078      up deleting code that is not really dead.
   7079 
   7080      If some otherwise unused register is only used in DEBUG_INSNs,
   7081      try to create a DEBUG_EXPR temporary and emit a DEBUG_INSN before
   7082      the setter.  Then go through DEBUG_INSNs and if a DEBUG_EXPR
   7083      has been created for the unused register, replace it with
   7084      the DEBUG_EXPR, otherwise reset the DEBUG_INSN.  */
   7085   for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = prev)
   7086     {
   7087       int live_insn = 0;
   7088 
   7089       prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
   7090       if (!INSN_P (insn))
   7091 	continue;
   7092 
   7093       live_insn = insn_live_p (insn, counts);
   7094 
   7095       /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
   7096 	 being used.  */
   7097 
   7098       if (! live_insn && dbg_cnt (delete_trivial_dead))
   7099 	{
   7100 	  if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
   7101 	    {
   7102 	      if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
   7103 		count_reg_usage (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), counts + nreg,
   7104 				 NULL_RTX, -1);
   7105 	    }
   7106 	  else
   7107 	    {
   7108 	      rtx set;
   7109 	      if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
   7110 		  && (set = single_set (insn)) != NULL_RTX
   7111 		  && is_dead_reg (SET_DEST (set), counts)
   7112 		  /* Used at least once in some DEBUG_INSN.  */
   7113 		  && counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) + nreg] > 0
   7114 		  /* And set exactly once.  */
   7115 		  && counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) + nreg * 2] == 1
   7116 		  && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
   7117 		  && asm_noperands (PATTERN (insn)) < 0)
   7118 		{
   7119 		  rtx dval, bind_var_loc;
   7120 		  rtx_insn *bind;
   7121 
   7122 		  /* Create DEBUG_EXPR (and DEBUG_EXPR_DECL).  */
   7123 		  dval = make_debug_expr_from_rtl (SET_DEST (set));
   7124 
   7125 		  /* Emit a debug bind insn before the insn in which
   7126 		     reg dies.  */
   7127 		  bind_var_loc =
   7128 		    gen_rtx_VAR_LOCATION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)),
   7129 					  DEBUG_EXPR_TREE_DECL (dval),
   7130 					  SET_SRC (set),
   7131 					  VAR_INIT_STATUS_INITIALIZED);
   7132 		  count_reg_usage (bind_var_loc, counts + nreg, NULL_RTX, 1);
   7133 
   7134 		  bind = emit_debug_insn_before (bind_var_loc, insn);
   7135 		  df_insn_rescan (bind);
   7136 
   7137 		  if (replacements == NULL)
   7138 		    replacements = XCNEWVEC (rtx, nreg);
   7139 		  replacements[REGNO (SET_DEST (set))] = dval;
   7140 		}
   7141 
   7142 	      count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, -1);
   7143 	      ndead++;
   7144 	    }
   7145 	  cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
   7146 	}
   7147     }
   7148 
   7149   if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS)
   7150     {
   7151       for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
   7152 	if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
   7153 	  {
   7154 	    /* If this debug insn references a dead register that wasn't replaced
   7155 	       with an DEBUG_EXPR, reset the DEBUG_INSN.  */
   7156 	    bool seen_repl = false;
   7157 	    if (is_dead_debug_insn (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn),
   7158 				    counts, replacements, &seen_repl))
   7159 	      {
   7160 		INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn) = gen_rtx_UNKNOWN_VAR_LOC ();
   7161 		df_insn_rescan (insn);
   7162 	      }
   7163 	    else if (seen_repl)
   7164 	      {
   7165 		INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn)
   7166 		  = simplify_replace_fn_rtx (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn),
   7167 					     NULL_RTX, replace_dead_reg,
   7168 					     replacements);
   7169 		df_insn_rescan (insn);
   7170 	      }
   7171 	  }
   7172       free (replacements);
   7173     }
   7174 
   7175   if (dump_file && ndead)
   7176     fprintf (dump_file, "Deleted %i trivially dead insns\n",
   7177 	     ndead);
   7178   /* Clean up.  */
   7179   free (counts);
   7180   timevar_pop (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
   7181   return ndead;
   7182 }
   7183 
   7184 /* If LOC contains references to NEWREG in a different mode, change them
   7185    to use NEWREG instead.  */
   7186 
   7187 static void
   7188 cse_change_cc_mode (subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type &array,
   7189 		    rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, rtx newreg)
   7190 {
   7191   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter, array, loc, NONCONST)
   7192     {
   7193       rtx *loc = *iter;
   7194       rtx x = *loc;
   7195       if (x
   7196 	  && REG_P (x)
   7197 	  && REGNO (x) == REGNO (newreg)
   7198 	  && GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (newreg))
   7199 	{
   7200 	  validate_change (insn, loc, newreg, 1);
   7201 	  iter.skip_subrtxes ();
   7202 	}
   7203     }
   7204 }
   7205 
   7206 /* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
   7207    GET_MODE (NEWREG) in INSN.  */
   7208 
   7209 static void
   7210 cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx_insn *insn, rtx newreg)
   7211 {
   7212   int success;
   7213 
   7214   if (!INSN_P (insn))
   7215     return;
   7216 
   7217   subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array;
   7218   cse_change_cc_mode (array, &PATTERN (insn), insn, newreg);
   7219   cse_change_cc_mode (array, &REG_NOTES (insn), insn, newreg);
   7220 
   7221   /* If the following assertion was triggered, there is most probably
   7222      something wrong with the cc_modes_compatible back end function.
   7223      CC modes only can be considered compatible if the insn - with the mode
   7224      replaced by any of the compatible modes - can still be recognized.  */
   7225   success = apply_change_group ();
   7226   gcc_assert (success);
   7227 }
   7228 
   7229 /* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
   7230    GET_MODE (NEWREG), starting at START.  Stop before END.  Stop at
   7231    any instruction which modifies NEWREG.  */
   7232 
   7233 static void
   7234 cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx_insn *start, rtx_insn *end, rtx newreg)
   7235 {
   7236   rtx_insn *insn;
   7237 
   7238   for (insn = start; insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
   7239     {
   7240       if (! INSN_P (insn))
   7241 	continue;
   7242 
   7243       if (reg_set_p (newreg, insn))
   7244 	return;
   7245 
   7246       cse_change_cc_mode_insn (insn, newreg);
   7247     }
   7248 }
   7249 
   7250 /* BB is a basic block which finishes with CC_REG as a condition code
   7251    register which is set to CC_SRC.  Look through the successors of BB
   7252    to find blocks which have a single predecessor (i.e., this one),
   7253    and look through those blocks for an assignment to CC_REG which is
   7254    equivalent to CC_SRC.  CAN_CHANGE_MODE indicates whether we are
   7255    permitted to change the mode of CC_SRC to a compatible mode.  This
   7256    returns VOIDmode if no equivalent assignments were found.
   7257    Otherwise it returns the mode which CC_SRC should wind up with.
   7258    ORIG_BB should be the same as BB in the outermost cse_cc_succs call,
   7259    but is passed unmodified down to recursive calls in order to prevent
   7260    endless recursion.
   7261 
   7262    The main complexity in this function is handling the mode issues.
   7263    We may have more than one duplicate which we can eliminate, and we
   7264    try to find a mode which will work for multiple duplicates.  */
   7265 
   7266 static machine_mode
   7267 cse_cc_succs (basic_block bb, basic_block orig_bb, rtx cc_reg, rtx cc_src,
   7268 	      bool can_change_mode)
   7269 {
   7270   bool found_equiv;
   7271   machine_mode mode;
   7272   unsigned int insn_count;
   7273   edge e;
   7274   rtx_insn *insns[2];
   7275   machine_mode modes[2];
   7276   rtx_insn *last_insns[2];
   7277   unsigned int i;
   7278   rtx newreg;
   7279   edge_iterator ei;
   7280 
   7281   /* We expect to have two successors.  Look at both before picking
   7282      the final mode for the comparison.  If we have more successors
   7283      (i.e., some sort of table jump, although that seems unlikely),
   7284      then we require all beyond the first two to use the same
   7285      mode.  */
   7286 
   7287   found_equiv = false;
   7288   mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
   7289   insn_count = 0;
   7290   FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
   7291     {
   7292       rtx_insn *insn;
   7293       rtx_insn *end;
   7294 
   7295       if (e->flags & EDGE_COMPLEX)
   7296 	continue;
   7297 
   7298       if (EDGE_COUNT (e->dest->preds) != 1
   7299 	  || e->dest == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
   7300 	  /* Avoid endless recursion on unreachable blocks.  */
   7301 	  || e->dest == orig_bb)
   7302 	continue;
   7303 
   7304       end = NEXT_INSN (BB_END (e->dest));
   7305       for (insn = BB_HEAD (e->dest); insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
   7306 	{
   7307 	  rtx set;
   7308 
   7309 	  if (! INSN_P (insn))
   7310 	    continue;
   7311 
   7312 	  /* If CC_SRC is modified, we have to stop looking for
   7313 	     something which uses it.  */
   7314 	  if (modified_in_p (cc_src, insn))
   7315 	    break;
   7316 
   7317 	  /* Check whether INSN sets CC_REG to CC_SRC.  */
   7318 	  set = single_set (insn);
   7319 	  if (set
   7320 	      && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
   7321 	      && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
   7322 	    {
   7323 	      bool found;
   7324 	      machine_mode set_mode;
   7325 	      machine_mode comp_mode;
   7326 
   7327 	      found = false;
   7328 	      set_mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (set));
   7329 	      comp_mode = set_mode;
   7330 	      if (rtx_equal_p (cc_src, SET_SRC (set)))
   7331 		found = true;
   7332 	      else if (GET_CODE (cc_src) == COMPARE
   7333 		       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == COMPARE
   7334 		       && mode != set_mode
   7335 		       && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 0),
   7336 				       XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0))
   7337 		       && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 1),
   7338 				       XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1)))
   7339 
   7340 		{
   7341 		  comp_mode = targetm.cc_modes_compatible (mode, set_mode);
   7342 		  if (comp_mode != VOIDmode
   7343 		      && (can_change_mode || comp_mode == mode))
   7344 		    found = true;
   7345 		}
   7346 
   7347 	      if (found)
   7348 		{
   7349 		  found_equiv = true;
   7350 		  if (insn_count < ARRAY_SIZE (insns))
   7351 		    {
   7352 		      insns[insn_count] = insn;
   7353 		      modes[insn_count] = set_mode;
   7354 		      last_insns[insn_count] = end;
   7355 		      ++insn_count;
   7356 
   7357 		      if (mode != comp_mode)
   7358 			{
   7359 			  gcc_assert (can_change_mode);
   7360 			  mode = comp_mode;
   7361 
   7362 			  /* The modified insn will be re-recognized later.  */
   7363 			  PUT_MODE (cc_src, mode);
   7364 			}
   7365 		    }
   7366 		  else
   7367 		    {
   7368 		      if (set_mode != mode)
   7369 			{
   7370 			  /* We found a matching expression in the
   7371 			     wrong mode, but we don't have room to
   7372 			     store it in the array.  Punt.  This case
   7373 			     should be rare.  */
   7374 			  break;
   7375 			}
   7376 		      /* INSN sets CC_REG to a value equal to CC_SRC
   7377 			 with the right mode.  We can simply delete
   7378 			 it.  */
   7379 		      delete_insn (insn);
   7380 		    }
   7381 
   7382 		  /* We found an instruction to delete.  Keep looking,
   7383 		     in the hopes of finding a three-way jump.  */
   7384 		  continue;
   7385 		}
   7386 
   7387 	      /* We found an instruction which sets the condition
   7388 		 code, so don't look any farther.  */
   7389 	      break;
   7390 	    }
   7391 
   7392 	  /* If INSN sets CC_REG in some other way, don't look any
   7393 	     farther.  */
   7394 	  if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
   7395 	    break;
   7396 	}
   7397 
   7398       /* If we fell off the bottom of the block, we can keep looking
   7399 	 through successors.  We pass CAN_CHANGE_MODE as false because
   7400 	 we aren't prepared to handle compatibility between the
   7401 	 further blocks and this block.  */
   7402       if (insn == end)
   7403 	{
   7404 	  machine_mode submode;
   7405 
   7406 	  submode = cse_cc_succs (e->dest, orig_bb, cc_reg, cc_src, false);
   7407 	  if (submode != VOIDmode)
   7408 	    {
   7409 	      gcc_assert (submode == mode);
   7410 	      found_equiv = true;
   7411 	      can_change_mode = false;
   7412 	    }
   7413 	}
   7414     }
   7415 
   7416   if (! found_equiv)
   7417     return VOIDmode;
   7418 
   7419   /* Now INSN_COUNT is the number of instructions we found which set
   7420      CC_REG to a value equivalent to CC_SRC.  The instructions are in
   7421      INSNS.  The modes used by those instructions are in MODES.  */
   7422 
   7423   newreg = NULL_RTX;
   7424   for (i = 0; i < insn_count; ++i)
   7425     {
   7426       if (modes[i] != mode)
   7427 	{
   7428 	  /* We need to change the mode of CC_REG in INSNS[i] and
   7429 	     subsequent instructions.  */
   7430 	  if (! newreg)
   7431 	    {
   7432 	      if (GET_MODE (cc_reg) == mode)
   7433 		newreg = cc_reg;
   7434 	      else
   7435 		newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
   7436 	    }
   7437 	  cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (insns[i]), last_insns[i],
   7438 				    newreg);
   7439 	}
   7440 
   7441       cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insns[i]);
   7442     }
   7443 
   7444   return mode;
   7445 }
   7446 
   7447 /* If we have a fixed condition code register (or two), walk through
   7448    the instructions and try to eliminate duplicate assignments.  */
   7449 
   7450 static void
   7451 cse_condition_code_reg (void)
   7452 {
   7453   unsigned int cc_regno_1;
   7454   unsigned int cc_regno_2;
   7455   rtx cc_reg_1;
   7456   rtx cc_reg_2;
   7457   basic_block bb;
   7458 
   7459   if (! targetm.fixed_condition_code_regs (&cc_regno_1, &cc_regno_2))
   7460     return;
   7461 
   7462   cc_reg_1 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_1);
   7463   if (cc_regno_2 != INVALID_REGNUM)
   7464     cc_reg_2 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_2);
   7465   else
   7466     cc_reg_2 = NULL_RTX;
   7467 
   7468   FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
   7469     {
   7470       rtx_insn *last_insn;
   7471       rtx cc_reg;
   7472       rtx_insn *insn;
   7473       rtx_insn *cc_src_insn;
   7474       rtx cc_src;
   7475       machine_mode mode;
   7476       machine_mode orig_mode;
   7477 
   7478       /* Look for blocks which end with a conditional jump based on a
   7479 	 condition code register.  Then look for the instruction which
   7480 	 sets the condition code register.  Then look through the
   7481 	 successor blocks for instructions which set the condition
   7482 	 code register to the same value.  There are other possible
   7483 	 uses of the condition code register, but these are by far the
   7484 	 most common and the ones which we are most likely to be able
   7485 	 to optimize.  */
   7486 
   7487       last_insn = BB_END (bb);
   7488       if (!JUMP_P (last_insn))
   7489 	continue;
   7490 
   7491       if (reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_1, PATTERN (last_insn)))
   7492 	cc_reg = cc_reg_1;
   7493       else if (cc_reg_2 && reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_2, PATTERN (last_insn)))
   7494 	cc_reg = cc_reg_2;
   7495       else
   7496 	continue;
   7497 
   7498       cc_src_insn = NULL;
   7499       cc_src = NULL_RTX;
   7500       for (insn = PREV_INSN (last_insn);
   7501 	   insn && insn != PREV_INSN (BB_HEAD (bb));
   7502 	   insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
   7503 	{
   7504 	  rtx set;
   7505 
   7506 	  if (! INSN_P (insn))
   7507 	    continue;
   7508 	  set = single_set (insn);
   7509 	  if (set
   7510 	      && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
   7511 	      && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
   7512 	    {
   7513 	      cc_src_insn = insn;
   7514 	      cc_src = SET_SRC (set);
   7515 	      break;
   7516 	    }
   7517 	  else if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
   7518 	    break;
   7519 	}
   7520 
   7521       if (! cc_src_insn)
   7522 	continue;
   7523 
   7524       if (modified_between_p (cc_src, cc_src_insn, NEXT_INSN (last_insn)))
   7525 	continue;
   7526 
   7527       /* Now CC_REG is a condition code register used for a
   7528 	 conditional jump at the end of the block, and CC_SRC, in
   7529 	 CC_SRC_INSN, is the value to which that condition code
   7530 	 register is set, and CC_SRC is still meaningful at the end of
   7531 	 the basic block.  */
   7532 
   7533       orig_mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
   7534       mode = cse_cc_succs (bb, bb, cc_reg, cc_src, true);
   7535       if (mode != VOIDmode)
   7536 	{
   7537 	  gcc_assert (mode == GET_MODE (cc_src));
   7538 	  if (mode != orig_mode)
   7539 	    {
   7540 	      rtx newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
   7541 
   7542 	      cse_change_cc_mode_insn (cc_src_insn, newreg);
   7543 
   7544 	      /* Do the same in the following insns that use the
   7545 		 current value of CC_REG within BB.  */
   7546 	      cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (cc_src_insn),
   7547 					NEXT_INSN (last_insn),
   7548 					newreg);
   7549 	    }
   7550 	}
   7551     }
   7552 }
   7553 
   7554 
   7556 /* Perform common subexpression elimination.  Nonzero value from
   7557    `cse_main' means that jumps were simplified and some code may now
   7558    be unreachable, so do jump optimization again.  */
   7559 static unsigned int
   7560 rest_of_handle_cse (void)
   7561 {
   7562   int tem;
   7563 
   7564   if (dump_file)
   7565     dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
   7566 
   7567   tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
   7568 
   7569   /* If we are not running more CSE passes, then we are no longer
   7570      expecting CSE to be run.  But always rerun it in a cheap mode.  */
   7571   cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop && !flag_gcse;
   7572 
   7573   if (tem == 2)
   7574     {
   7575       timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
   7576       rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
   7577       cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
   7578       timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
   7579     }
   7580   else if (tem == 1 || optimize > 1)
   7581     cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
   7582 
   7583   return 0;
   7584 }
   7585 
   7586 namespace {
   7587 
   7588 const pass_data pass_data_cse =
   7589 {
   7590   RTL_PASS, /* type */
   7591   "cse1", /* name */
   7592   OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
   7593   TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
   7594   0, /* properties_required */
   7595   0, /* properties_provided */
   7596   0, /* properties_destroyed */
   7597   0, /* todo_flags_start */
   7598   TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
   7599 };
   7600 
   7601 class pass_cse : public rtl_opt_pass
   7602 {
   7603 public:
   7604   pass_cse (gcc::context *ctxt)
   7605     : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse, ctxt)
   7606   {}
   7607 
   7608   /* opt_pass methods: */
   7609   virtual bool gate (function *) { return optimize > 0; }
   7610   virtual unsigned int execute (function *) { return rest_of_handle_cse (); }
   7611 
   7612 }; // class pass_cse
   7613 
   7614 } // anon namespace
   7615 
   7616 rtl_opt_pass *
   7617 make_pass_cse (gcc::context *ctxt)
   7618 {
   7619   return new pass_cse (ctxt);
   7620 }
   7621 
   7622 
   7623 /* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations.  */
   7624 static unsigned int
   7625 rest_of_handle_cse2 (void)
   7626 {
   7627   int tem;
   7628 
   7629   if (dump_file)
   7630     dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
   7631 
   7632   tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
   7633 
   7634   /* Run a pass to eliminate duplicated assignments to condition code
   7635      registers.  We have to run this after bypass_jumps, because it
   7636      makes it harder for that pass to determine whether a jump can be
   7637      bypassed safely.  */
   7638   cse_condition_code_reg ();
   7639 
   7640   delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
   7641 
   7642   if (tem == 2)
   7643     {
   7644       timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
   7645       rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
   7646       cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
   7647       timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
   7648     }
   7649   else if (tem == 1 || cse_cfg_altered)
   7650     cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
   7651 
   7652   cse_not_expected = 1;
   7653   return 0;
   7654 }
   7655 
   7656 
   7657 namespace {
   7658 
   7659 const pass_data pass_data_cse2 =
   7660 {
   7661   RTL_PASS, /* type */
   7662   "cse2", /* name */
   7663   OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
   7664   TV_CSE2, /* tv_id */
   7665   0, /* properties_required */
   7666   0, /* properties_provided */
   7667   0, /* properties_destroyed */
   7668   0, /* todo_flags_start */
   7669   TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
   7670 };
   7671 
   7672 class pass_cse2 : public rtl_opt_pass
   7673 {
   7674 public:
   7675   pass_cse2 (gcc::context *ctxt)
   7676     : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse2, ctxt)
   7677   {}
   7678 
   7679   /* opt_pass methods: */
   7680   virtual bool gate (function *)
   7681     {
   7682       return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
   7683     }
   7684 
   7685   virtual unsigned int execute (function *) { return rest_of_handle_cse2 (); }
   7686 
   7687 }; // class pass_cse2
   7688 
   7689 } // anon namespace
   7690 
   7691 rtl_opt_pass *
   7692 make_pass_cse2 (gcc::context *ctxt)
   7693 {
   7694   return new pass_cse2 (ctxt);
   7695 }
   7696 
   7697 /* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations.  */
   7698 static unsigned int
   7699 rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts (void)
   7700 {
   7701   int save_cfj;
   7702   int tem;
   7703 
   7704   /* We only want to do local CSE, so don't follow jumps.  */
   7705   save_cfj = flag_cse_follow_jumps;
   7706   flag_cse_follow_jumps = 0;
   7707 
   7708   rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
   7709   tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
   7710   cse_cfg_altered |= purge_all_dead_edges ();
   7711   delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
   7712 
   7713   cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
   7714 
   7715   /* If cse altered any jumps, rerun jump opts to clean things up.  */
   7716   if (tem == 2)
   7717     {
   7718       timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
   7719       rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
   7720       cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
   7721       timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
   7722     }
   7723   else if (tem == 1 || cse_cfg_altered)
   7724     cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
   7725 
   7726   flag_cse_follow_jumps = save_cfj;
   7727   return 0;
   7728 }
   7729 
   7730 namespace {
   7731 
   7732 const pass_data pass_data_cse_after_global_opts =
   7733 {
   7734   RTL_PASS, /* type */
   7735   "cse_local", /* name */
   7736   OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
   7737   TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
   7738   0, /* properties_required */
   7739   0, /* properties_provided */
   7740   0, /* properties_destroyed */
   7741   0, /* todo_flags_start */
   7742   TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
   7743 };
   7744 
   7745 class pass_cse_after_global_opts : public rtl_opt_pass
   7746 {
   7747 public:
   7748   pass_cse_after_global_opts (gcc::context *ctxt)
   7749     : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse_after_global_opts, ctxt)
   7750   {}
   7751 
   7752   /* opt_pass methods: */
   7753   virtual bool gate (function *)
   7754     {
   7755       return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_global_opts;
   7756     }
   7757 
   7758   virtual unsigned int execute (function *)
   7759     {
   7760       return rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts ();
   7761     }
   7762 
   7763 }; // class pass_cse_after_global_opts
   7764 
   7765 } // anon namespace
   7766 
   7767 rtl_opt_pass *
   7768 make_pass_cse_after_global_opts (gcc::context *ctxt)
   7769 {
   7770   return new pass_cse_after_global_opts (ctxt);
   7771 }
   7772